blob: 2d4f0eb3ba1cfaf3c8d3bd922f343d9440a8ab7d [file] [log] [blame]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001 ----------------------
2 HAProxy
3 Configuration Manual
4 ----------------------
Willy Tarreau79158882009-06-09 11:59:08 +02005 version 1.4
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006 willy tarreau
Willy Tarreaue18fdfd2010-02-26 14:55:22 +01007 2010/02/26
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02008
9
10This document covers the configuration language as implemented in the version
11specified above. It does not provide any hint, example or advice. For such
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +010012documentation, please refer to the Reference Manual or the Architecture Manual.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020013The summary below is meant to help you search sections by name and navigate
14through the document.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +020015
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020016Note to documentation contributors :
17 This document is formated with 80 columns per line, with even number of
18 spaces for indentation and without tabs. Please follow these rules strictly
19 so that it remains easily printable everywhere. If a line needs to be
20 printed verbatim and does not fit, please end each line with a backslash
21 ('\') and continue on next line. If you add sections, please update the
22 summary below for easier searching.
23
24
25Summary
26-------
27
281. Quick reminder about HTTP
291.1. The HTTP transaction model
301.2. HTTP request
311.2.1. The Request line
321.2.2. The request headers
331.3. HTTP response
341.3.1. The Response line
351.3.2. The response headers
36
372. Configuring HAProxy
382.1. Configuration file format
392.2. Time format
40
413. Global parameters
423.1. Process management and security
433.2. Performance tuning
443.3. Debugging
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100453.4. Userlists
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020046
474. Proxies
484.1. Proxy keywords matrix
494.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
50
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +0100515. Server and default-server options
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020052
536. HTTP header manipulation
54
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100557. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200567.1. Matching integers
577.2. Matching strings
587.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
597.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
607.5. Available matching criteria
617.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
627.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
637.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
647.6. Pre-defined ACLs
657.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100667.8. Pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067
688. Logging
698.1. Log levels
708.2. Log formats
718.2.1. Default log format
728.2.2. TCP log format
738.2.3. HTTP log format
748.3. Advanced logging options
758.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
768.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
778.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
788.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
798.4. Timing events
808.5. Session state at disconnection
818.6. Non-printable characters
828.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
838.8. Capturing HTTP headers
848.9. Examples of logs
85
869. Statistics and monitoring
879.1. CSV format
889.2. Unix Socket commands
89
90
911. Quick reminder about HTTP
92----------------------------
93
94When haproxy is running in HTTP mode, both the request and the response are
95fully analyzed and indexed, thus it becomes possible to build matching criteria
96on almost anything found in the contents.
97
98However, it is important to understand how HTTP requests and responses are
99formed, and how HAProxy decomposes them. It will then become easier to write
100correct rules and to debug existing configurations.
101
102
1031.1. The HTTP transaction model
104-------------------------------
105
106The HTTP protocol is transaction-driven. This means that each request will lead
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100107to one and only one response. Traditionally, a TCP connection is established
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200108from the client to the server, a request is sent by the client on the
109connection, the server responds and the connection is closed. A new request
110will involve a new connection :
111
112 [CON1] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [CLO1] [CON2] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO2] ...
113
114In this mode, called the "HTTP close" mode, there are as many connection
115establishments as there are HTTP transactions. Since the connection is closed
116by the server after the response, the client does not need to know the content
117length.
118
119Due to the transactional nature of the protocol, it was possible to improve it
120to avoid closing a connection between two subsequent transactions. In this mode
121however, it is mandatory that the server indicates the content length for each
122response so that the client does not wait indefinitely. For this, a special
123header is used: "Content-length". This mode is called the "keep-alive" mode :
124
125 [CON] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO] ...
126
127Its advantages are a reduced latency between transactions, and less processing
128power required on the server side. It is generally better than the close mode,
129but not always because the clients often limit their concurrent connections to
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +0100130a smaller value. HAProxy currently only supports the HTTP keep-alive mode on
131the client side, and transforms it to a close mode on the server side.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200132
133A last improvement in the communications is the pipelining mode. It still uses
134keep-alive, but the client does not wait for the first response to send the
135second request. This is useful for fetching large number of images composing a
136page :
137
138 [CON] [REQ1] [REQ2] ... [RESP1] [RESP2] [CLO] ...
139
140This can obviously have a tremendous benefit on performance because the network
141latency is eliminated between subsequent requests. Many HTTP agents do not
142correctly support pipelining since there is no way to associate a response with
143the corresponding request in HTTP. For this reason, it is mandatory for the
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +0100144server to reply in the exact same order as the requests were received. HAProxy
145supports pipelined requsts on the client side and processes them one at a time.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200146
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200147
1481.2. HTTP request
149-----------------
150
151First, let's consider this HTTP request :
152
153 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100154 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200155 1 GET /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2 HTTP/1.1
156 2 Host: www.mydomain.com
157 3 User-agent: my small browser
158 4 Accept: image/jpeg, image/gif
159 5 Accept: image/png
160
161
1621.2.1. The Request line
163-----------------------
164
165Line 1 is the "request line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
166
167 - a METHOD : GET
168 - a URI : /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
169 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
170
171All of them are delimited by what the standard calls LWS (linear white spaces),
172which are commonly spaces, but can also be tabs or line feeds/carriage returns
173followed by spaces/tabs. The method itself cannot contain any colon (':') and
174is limited to alphabetic letters. All those various combinations make it
175desirable that HAProxy performs the splitting itself rather than leaving it to
176the user to write a complex or inaccurate regular expression.
177
178The URI itself can have several forms :
179
180 - A "relative URI" :
181
182 /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
183
184 It is a complete URL without the host part. This is generally what is
185 received by servers, reverse proxies and transparent proxies.
186
187 - An "absolute URI", also called a "URL" :
188
189 http://192.168.0.12:8080/serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
190
191 It is composed of a "scheme" (the protocol name followed by '://'), a host
192 name or address, optionally a colon (':') followed by a port number, then
193 a relative URI beginning at the first slash ('/') after the address part.
194 This is generally what proxies receive, but a server supporting HTTP/1.1
195 must accept this form too.
196
197 - a star ('*') : this form is only accepted in association with the OPTIONS
198 method and is not relayable. It is used to inquiry a next hop's
199 capabilities.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100200
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200201 - an address:port combination : 192.168.0.12:80
202 This is used with the CONNECT method, which is used to establish TCP
203 tunnels through HTTP proxies, generally for HTTPS, but sometimes for
204 other protocols too.
205
206In a relative URI, two sub-parts are identified. The part before the question
207mark is called the "path". It is typically the relative path to static objects
208on the server. The part after the question mark is called the "query string".
209It is mostly used with GET requests sent to dynamic scripts and is very
210specific to the language, framework or application in use.
211
212
2131.2.2. The request headers
214--------------------------
215
216The headers start at the second line. They are composed of a name at the
217beginning of the line, immediately followed by a colon (':'). Traditionally,
218an LWS is added after the colon but that's not required. Then come the values.
219Multiple identical headers may be folded into one single line, delimiting the
220values with commas, provided that their order is respected. This is commonly
221encountered in the "Cookie:" field. A header may span over multiple lines if
222the subsequent lines begin with an LWS. In the example in 1.2, lines 4 and 5
223define a total of 3 values for the "Accept:" header.
224
225Contrary to a common mis-conception, header names are not case-sensitive, and
226their values are not either if they refer to other header names (such as the
227"Connection:" header).
228
229The end of the headers is indicated by the first empty line. People often say
230that it's a double line feed, which is not exact, even if a double line feed
231is one valid form of empty line.
232
233Fortunately, HAProxy takes care of all these complex combinations when indexing
234headers, checking values and counting them, so there is no reason to worry
235about the way they could be written, but it is important not to accuse an
236application of being buggy if it does unusual, valid things.
237
238Important note:
239 As suggested by RFC2616, HAProxy normalizes headers by replacing line breaks
240 in the middle of headers by LWS in order to join multi-line headers. This
241 is necessary for proper analysis and helps less capable HTTP parsers to work
242 correctly and not to be fooled by such complex constructs.
243
244
2451.3. HTTP response
246------------------
247
248An HTTP response looks very much like an HTTP request. Both are called HTTP
249messages. Let's consider this HTTP response :
250
251 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100252 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200253 1 HTTP/1.1 200 OK
254 2 Content-length: 350
255 3 Content-Type: text/html
256
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200257As a special case, HTTP supports so called "Informational responses" as status
258codes 1xx. These messages are special in that they don't convey any part of the
259response, they're just used as sort of a signaling message to ask a client to
Willy Tarreau5843d1a2010-02-01 15:13:32 +0100260continue to post its request for instance. In the case of a status 100 response
261the requested information will be carried by the next non-100 response message
262following the informational one. This implies that multiple responses may be
263sent to a single request, and that this only works when keep-alive is enabled
264(1xx messages are HTTP/1.1 only). HAProxy handles these messages and is able to
265correctly forward and skip them, and only process the next non-100 response. As
266such, these messages are neither logged nor transformed, unless explicitly
267state otherwise. Status 101 messages indicate that the protocol is changing
268over the same connection and that haproxy must switch to tunnel mode, just as
269if a CONNECT had occurred. Then the Upgrade header would contain additional
270information about the type of protocol the connection is switching to.
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200271
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200272
2731.3.1. The Response line
274------------------------
275
276Line 1 is the "response line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
277
278 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
279 - a status code : 200
280 - a reason : OK
281
282The status code is always 3-digit. The first digit indicates a general status :
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200283 - 1xx = informational message to be skipped (eg: 100, 101)
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200284 - 2xx = OK, content is following (eg: 200, 206)
285 - 3xx = OK, no content following (eg: 302, 304)
286 - 4xx = error caused by the client (eg: 401, 403, 404)
287 - 5xx = error caused by the server (eg: 500, 502, 503)
288
289Please refer to RFC2616 for the detailed meaning of all such codes. The
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100290"reason" field is just a hint, but is not parsed by clients. Anything can be
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200291found there, but it's a common practice to respect the well-established
292messages. It can be composed of one or multiple words, such as "OK", "Found",
293or "Authentication Required".
294
295Haproxy may emit the following status codes by itself :
296
297 Code When / reason
298 200 access to stats page, and when replying to monitoring requests
299 301 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
300 302 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
301 303 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
302 400 for an invalid or too large request
303 401 when an authentication is required to perform the action (when
304 accessing the stats page)
305 403 when a request is forbidden by a "block" ACL or "reqdeny" filter
306 408 when the request timeout strikes before the request is complete
307 500 when haproxy encounters an unrecoverable internal error, such as a
308 memory allocation failure, which should never happen
309 502 when the server returns an empty, invalid or incomplete response, or
310 when an "rspdeny" filter blocks the response.
311 503 when no server was available to handle the request, or in response to
312 monitoring requests which match the "monitor fail" condition
313 504 when the response timeout strikes before the server responds
314
315The error 4xx and 5xx codes above may be customized (see "errorloc" in section
3164.2).
317
318
3191.3.2. The response headers
320---------------------------
321
322Response headers work exactly like request headers, and as such, HAProxy uses
323the same parsing function for both. Please refer to paragraph 1.2.2 for more
324details.
325
326
3272. Configuring HAProxy
328----------------------
329
3302.1. Configuration file format
331------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200332
333HAProxy's configuration process involves 3 major sources of parameters :
334
335 - the arguments from the command-line, which always take precedence
336 - the "global" section, which sets process-wide parameters
337 - the proxies sections which can take form of "defaults", "listen",
338 "frontend" and "backend".
339
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100340The configuration file syntax consists in lines beginning with a keyword
341referenced in this manual, optionally followed by one or several parameters
342delimited by spaces. If spaces have to be entered in strings, then they must be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100343preceded by a backslash ('\') to be escaped. Backslashes also have to be
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100344escaped by doubling them.
345
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200346
3472.2. Time format
348----------------
349
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100350Some parameters involve values representing time, such as timeouts. These
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100351values are generally expressed in milliseconds (unless explicitly stated
352otherwise) but may be expressed in any other unit by suffixing the unit to the
353numeric value. It is important to consider this because it will not be repeated
354for every keyword. Supported units are :
355
356 - us : microseconds. 1 microsecond = 1/1000000 second
357 - ms : milliseconds. 1 millisecond = 1/1000 second. This is the default.
358 - s : seconds. 1s = 1000ms
359 - m : minutes. 1m = 60s = 60000ms
360 - h : hours. 1h = 60m = 3600s = 3600000ms
361 - d : days. 1d = 24h = 1440m = 86400s = 86400000ms
362
363
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003643. Global parameters
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200365--------------------
366
367Parameters in the "global" section are process-wide and often OS-specific. They
368are generally set once for all and do not need being changed once correct. Some
369of them have command-line equivalents.
370
371The following keywords are supported in the "global" section :
372
373 * Process management and security
374 - chroot
375 - daemon
376 - gid
377 - group
378 - log
379 - nbproc
380 - pidfile
381 - uid
382 - ulimit-n
383 - user
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200384 - stats
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200385 - node
386 - description
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100387
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200388 * Performance tuning
389 - maxconn
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100390 - maxpipes
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200391 - noepoll
392 - nokqueue
393 - nopoll
394 - nosepoll
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100395 - nosplice
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200396 - spread-checks
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200397 - tune.bufsize
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100398 - tune.maxaccept
399 - tune.maxpollevents
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200400 - tune.maxrewrite
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100401 - tune.rcvbuf.client
402 - tune.rcvbuf.server
403 - tune.sndbuf.client
404 - tune.sndbuf.server
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100405
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200406 * Debugging
407 - debug
408 - quiet
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200409
410
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004113.1. Process management and security
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200412------------------------------------
413
414chroot <jail dir>
415 Changes current directory to <jail dir> and performs a chroot() there before
416 dropping privileges. This increases the security level in case an unknown
417 vulnerability would be exploited, since it would make it very hard for the
418 attacker to exploit the system. This only works when the process is started
419 with superuser privileges. It is important to ensure that <jail_dir> is both
420 empty and unwritable to anyone.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100421
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200422daemon
423 Makes the process fork into background. This is the recommended mode of
424 operation. It is equivalent to the command line "-D" argument. It can be
425 disabled by the command line "-db" argument.
426
427gid <number>
428 Changes the process' group ID to <number>. It is recommended that the group
429 ID is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
430 be started with a user belonging to this group, or with superuser privileges.
431 See also "group" and "uid".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100432
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200433group <group name>
434 Similar to "gid" but uses the GID of group name <group name> from /etc/group.
435 See also "gid" and "user".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100436
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200437log <address> <facility> [max level [min level]]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200438 Adds a global syslog server. Up to two global servers can be defined. They
439 will receive logs for startups and exits, as well as all logs from proxies
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100440 configured with "log global".
441
442 <address> can be one of:
443
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +0100444 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon and a UDP port. If
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100445 no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the standard syslog
446 port).
447
448 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
449 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible inside
450 the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is appropriately
451 writeable).
452
453 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200454
455 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
456 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
457 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
458
459 An optional level can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By default,
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200460 all messages are sent. If a maximum level is specified, only messages with a
461 severity at least as important as this level will be sent. An optional minimum
462 level can be specified. If it is set, logs emitted with a more severe level
463 than this one will be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending
464 "emerg" messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
465 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200466
467 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
468
469nbproc <number>
470 Creates <number> processes when going daemon. This requires the "daemon"
471 mode. By default, only one process is created, which is the recommended mode
472 of operation. For systems limited to small sets of file descriptors per
473 process, it may be needed to fork multiple daemons. USING MULTIPLE PROCESSES
474 IS HARDER TO DEBUG AND IS REALLY DISCOURAGED. See also "daemon".
475
476pidfile <pidfile>
477 Writes pids of all daemons into file <pidfile>. This option is equivalent to
478 the "-p" command line argument. The file must be accessible to the user
479 starting the process. See also "daemon".
480
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200481stats socket <path> [{uid | user} <uid>] [{gid | group} <gid>] [mode <mode>]
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200482 [level <level>]
483
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200484 Creates a UNIX socket in stream mode at location <path>. Any previously
485 existing socket will be backed up then replaced. Connections to this socket
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100486 will return various statistics outputs and even allow some commands to be
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200487 issued. Please consult section 9.2 "Unix Socket commands" for more details.
488
489 An optional "level" parameter can be specified to restrict the nature of
490 the commands that can be issued on the socket :
491 - "user" is the least privileged level ; only non-sensitive stats can be
492 read, and no change is allowed. It would make sense on systems where it
493 is not easy to restrict access to the socket.
494
495 - "operator" is the default level and fits most common uses. All data can
496 be read, and only non-sensible changes are permitted (eg: clear max
497 counters).
498
499 - "admin" should be used with care, as everything is permitted (eg: clear
500 all counters).
Willy Tarreaua8efd362008-01-03 10:19:15 +0100501
502 On platforms which support it, it is possible to restrict access to this
503 socket by specifying numerical IDs after "uid" and "gid", or valid user and
504 group names after the "user" and "group" keywords. It is also possible to
505 restrict permissions on the socket by passing an octal value after the "mode"
506 keyword (same syntax as chmod). Depending on the platform, the permissions on
507 the socket will be inherited from the directory which hosts it, or from the
508 user the process is started with.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200509
510stats timeout <timeout, in milliseconds>
511 The default timeout on the stats socket is set to 10 seconds. It is possible
512 to change this value with "stats timeout". The value must be passed in
Willy Tarreaubefdff12007-12-02 22:27:38 +0100513 milliseconds, or be suffixed by a time unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200514
515stats maxconn <connections>
516 By default, the stats socket is limited to 10 concurrent connections. It is
517 possible to change this value with "stats maxconn".
518
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200519uid <number>
520 Changes the process' user ID to <number>. It is recommended that the user ID
521 is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
522 be started with superuser privileges in order to be able to switch to another
523 one. See also "gid" and "user".
524
525ulimit-n <number>
526 Sets the maximum number of per-process file-descriptors to <number>. By
527 default, it is automatically computed, so it is recommended not to use this
528 option.
529
530user <user name>
531 Similar to "uid" but uses the UID of user name <user name> from /etc/passwd.
532 See also "uid" and "group".
533
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200534node <name>
535 Only letters, digits, hyphen and underscore are allowed, like in DNS names.
536
537 This statement is useful in HA configurations where two or more processes or
538 servers share the same IP address. By setting a different node-name on all
539 nodes, it becomes easy to immediately spot what server is handling the
540 traffic.
541
542description <text>
543 Add a text that describes the instance.
544
545 Please note that it is required to escape certain characters (# for example)
546 and this text is inserted into a html page so you should avoid using
547 "<" and ">" characters.
548
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200549
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005503.2. Performance tuning
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200551-----------------------
552
553maxconn <number>
554 Sets the maximum per-process number of concurrent connections to <number>. It
555 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-n". Proxies will stop accepting
556 connections when this limit is reached. The "ulimit-n" parameter is
557 automatically adjusted according to this value. See also "ulimit-n".
558
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100559maxpipes <number>
560 Sets the maximum per-process number of pipes to <number>. Currently, pipes
561 are only used by kernel-based tcp splicing. Since a pipe contains two file
562 descriptors, the "ulimit-n" value will be increased accordingly. The default
563 value is maxconn/4, which seems to be more than enough for most heavy usages.
564 The splice code dynamically allocates and releases pipes, and can fall back
565 to standard copy, so setting this value too low may only impact performance.
566
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200567noepoll
568 Disables the use of the "epoll" event polling system on Linux. It is
569 equivalent to the command-line argument "-de". The next polling system
570 used will generally be "poll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
571
572nokqueue
573 Disables the use of the "kqueue" event polling system on BSD. It is
574 equivalent to the command-line argument "-dk". The next polling system
575 used will generally be "poll". See also "nopoll".
576
577nopoll
578 Disables the use of the "poll" event polling system. It is equivalent to the
579 command-line argument "-dp". The next polling system used will be "select".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100580 It should never be needed to disable "poll" since it's available on all
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200581 platforms supported by HAProxy. See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll" and
582 "nokqueue".
583
584nosepoll
585 Disables the use of the "speculative epoll" event polling system on Linux. It
586 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-ds". The next polling system
587 used will generally be "epoll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
588
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100589nosplice
590 Disables the use of kernel tcp splicing between sockets on Linux. It is
591 equivalent to the command line argument "-dS". Data will then be copied
592 using conventional and more portable recv/send calls. Kernel tcp splicing is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100593 limited to some very recent instances of kernel 2.6. Most versions between
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100594 2.6.25 and 2.6.28 are buggy and will forward corrupted data, so they must not
595 be used. This option makes it easier to globally disable kernel splicing in
596 case of doubt. See also "option splice-auto", "option splice-request" and
597 "option splice-response".
598
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200599spread-checks <0..50, in percent>
600 Sometimes it is desirable to avoid sending health checks to servers at exact
601 intervals, for instance when many logical servers are located on the same
602 physical server. With the help of this parameter, it becomes possible to add
603 some randomness in the check interval between 0 and +/- 50%. A value between
604 2 and 5 seems to show good results. The default value remains at 0.
605
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200606tune.bufsize <number>
607 Sets the buffer size to this size (in bytes). Lower values allow more
608 sessions to coexist in the same amount of RAM, and higher values allow some
609 applications with very large cookies to work. The default value is 16384 and
610 can be changed at build time. It is strongly recommended not to change this
611 from the default value, as very low values will break some services such as
612 statistics, and values larger than default size will increase memory usage,
613 possibly causing the system to run out of memory. At least the global maxconn
614 parameter should be decreased by the same factor as this one is increased.
615
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100616tune.maxaccept <number>
617 Sets the maximum number of consecutive accepts that a process may perform on
618 a single wake up. High values give higher priority to high connection rates,
619 while lower values give higher priority to already established connections.
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100620 This value is limited to 100 by default in single process mode. However, in
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100621 multi-process mode (nbproc > 1), it defaults to 8 so that when one process
622 wakes up, it does not take all incoming connections for itself and leaves a
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100623 part of them to other processes. Setting this value to -1 completely disables
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100624 the limitation. It should normally not be needed to tweak this value.
625
626tune.maxpollevents <number>
627 Sets the maximum amount of events that can be processed at once in a call to
628 the polling system. The default value is adapted to the operating system. It
629 has been noticed that reducing it below 200 tends to slightly decrease
630 latency at the expense of network bandwidth, and increasing it above 200
631 tends to trade latency for slightly increased bandwidth.
632
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200633tune.maxrewrite <number>
634 Sets the reserved buffer space to this size in bytes. The reserved space is
635 used for header rewriting or appending. The first reads on sockets will never
636 fill more than bufsize-maxrewrite. Historically it has defaulted to half of
637 bufsize, though that does not make much sense since there are rarely large
638 numbers of headers to add. Setting it too high prevents processing of large
639 requests or responses. Setting it too low prevents addition of new headers
640 to already large requests or to POST requests. It is generally wise to set it
641 to about 1024. It is automatically readjusted to half of bufsize if it is
642 larger than that. This means you don't have to worry about it when changing
643 bufsize.
644
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100645tune.rcvbuf.client <number>
646tune.rcvbuf.server <number>
647 Forces the kernel socket receive buffer size on the client or the server side
648 to the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
649 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
650 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
651 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
652 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
653 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
654
655tune.sndbuf.client <number>
656tune.sndbuf.server <number>
657 Forces the kernel socket send buffer size on the client or the server side to
658 the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
659 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
660 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
661 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
662 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
663 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
664 Another use case is to prevent write timeouts with extremely slow clients due
665 to the kernel waiting for a large part of the buffer to be read before
666 notifying haproxy again.
667
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200668
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006693.3. Debugging
670--------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200671
672debug
673 Enables debug mode which dumps to stdout all exchanges, and disables forking
674 into background. It is the equivalent of the command-line argument "-d". It
675 should never be used in a production configuration since it may prevent full
676 system startup.
677
678quiet
679 Do not display any message during startup. It is equivalent to the command-
680 line argument "-q".
681
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006823.4. Userlists
683--------------
684It is possible to control access to frontend/backend/listen sections or to
685http stats by allowing only authenticated and authorized users. To do this,
686it is required to create at least one userlist and to define users.
687
688userlist <listname>
689 Creates new userlist with name <listname>. Many indepenend userlists can be
690 used to store authentication & authorization data for independent customers.
691
692group <groupname> [users <user>,<user>,(...)]
693 Adds group <gropname> to the current userlist. It is also possible to
694 attach users to this group by using a comma separated list of names
695 proceeded by "users" keyword.
696
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100697user <username> [password|insecure-password <password>]
698 [groups <group>,<group>,(...)]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100699 Adds user <username> to the current userlist. Both secure (encrypted) and
700 insecure (unencrypted) passwords can be used. Encrypted passwords are
701 evaluated using the crypt(3) function so dependig of the system's
702 capabilities, different algoritms are supported. For example modern Glibc
703 based Linux system supports MD5, SHA-256, SHA-512 and of course classic,
704 DES-based method of crypting passwords.
705
706
707 Example:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100708 userlist L1
709 group G1 users tiger,scott
710 group G2 users xdb,scott
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100711
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100712 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx9za9667qe4(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91
713 user scott insecure-password elgato
714 user xdb insecure-password hello
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100715
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100716 userlist L2
717 group G1
718 group G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100719
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100720 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91 groups G1
721 user scott insecure-password elgato groups G1,G2
722 user xdb insecure-password hello groups G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100723
724 Please note that both lists are functionally identical.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200725
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007264. Proxies
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200727----------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100728
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200729Proxy configuration can be located in a set of sections :
730 - defaults <name>
731 - frontend <name>
732 - backend <name>
733 - listen <name>
734
735A "defaults" section sets default parameters for all other sections following
736its declaration. Those default parameters are reset by the next "defaults"
737section. See below for the list of parameters which can be set in a "defaults"
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100738section. The name is optional but its use is encouraged for better readability.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200739
740A "frontend" section describes a set of listening sockets accepting client
741connections.
742
743A "backend" section describes a set of servers to which the proxy will connect
744to forward incoming connections.
745
746A "listen" section defines a complete proxy with its frontend and backend
747parts combined in one section. It is generally useful for TCP-only traffic.
748
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100749All proxy names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits,
750'-' (dash), '_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are
751case-sensitive, which means that "www" and "WWW" are two different proxies.
752
753Historically, all proxy names could overlap, it just caused troubles in the
754logs. Since the introduction of content switching, it is mandatory that two
755proxies with overlapping capabilities (frontend/backend) have different names.
756However, it is still permitted that a frontend and a backend share the same
757name, as this configuration seems to be commonly encountered.
758
759Right now, two major proxy modes are supported : "tcp", also known as layer 4,
760and "http", also known as layer 7. In layer 4 mode, HAProxy simply forwards
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100761bidirectional traffic between two sides. In layer 7 mode, HAProxy analyzes the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100762protocol, and can interact with it by allowing, blocking, switching, adding,
763modifying, or removing arbitrary contents in requests or responses, based on
764arbitrary criteria.
765
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100766
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007674.1. Proxy keywords matrix
768--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100769
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200770The following list of keywords is supported. Most of them may only be used in a
771limited set of section types. Some of them are marked as "deprecated" because
772they are inherited from an old syntax which may be confusing or functionally
773limited, and there are new recommended keywords to replace them. Keywords
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100774marked with "(*)" can be optionally inverted using the "no" prefix, eg. "no
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200775option contstats". This makes sense when the option has been enabled by default
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200776and must be disabled for a specific instance. Such options may also be prefixed
777with "default" in order to restore default settings regardless of what has been
778specified in a previous "defaults" section.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100779
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200780
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100781 keyword defaults frontend listen backend
782------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
783acl - X X X
784appsession - - X X
785backlog X X X -
786balance X - X X
787bind - X X -
788bind-process X X X X
789block - X X X
790capture cookie - X X -
791capture request header - X X -
792capture response header - X X -
793clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
794contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
795cookie X - X X
796default-server X - X X
797default_backend X X X -
798description - X X X
799disabled X X X X
800dispatch - - X X
801enabled X X X X
802errorfile X X X X
803errorloc X X X X
804errorloc302 X X X X
805-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
806errorloc303 X X X X
807fullconn X - X X
808grace X X X X
809hash-type X - X X
810http-check disable-on-404 X - X X
811http-request - X X X
812id - X X X
813log X X X X
814maxconn X X X -
815mode X X X X
816monitor fail - X X -
817monitor-net X X X -
818monitor-uri X X X -
819option abortonclose (*) X - X X
820option accept-invalid-http-request (*) X X X -
821option accept-invalid-http-response (*) X - X X
822option allbackups (*) X - X X
823option checkcache (*) X - X X
824option clitcpka (*) X X X -
825option contstats (*) X X X -
826option dontlog-normal (*) X X X -
827option dontlognull (*) X X X -
828option forceclose (*) X X X X
829-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
830option forwardfor X X X X
831option http-server-close (*) X X X X
832option http-use-proxy-header (*) X X X -
833option httpchk X - X X
834option httpclose (*) X X X X
835option httplog X X X X
836option http_proxy (*) X X X X
837option independant-streams (*) X X X X
838option log-health-checks (*) X - X X
839option log-separate-errors (*) X X X -
840option logasap (*) X X X -
841option mysql-check X - X X
842option nolinger (*) X X X X
843option originalto X X X X
844option persist (*) X - X X
845option redispatch (*) X - X X
846option smtpchk X - X X
847option socket-stats (*) X X X -
848option splice-auto (*) X X X X
849option splice-request (*) X X X X
850option splice-response (*) X X X X
851option srvtcpka (*) X - X X
852option ssl-hello-chk X - X X
853-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
854option tcp-smart-accept (*) X X X -
855option tcp-smart-connect (*) X - X X
856option tcpka X X X X
857option tcplog X X X X
858option transparent (*) X - X X
859persist rdp-cookie X - X X
860rate-limit sessions X X X -
861redirect - X X X
862redisp (deprecated) X - X X
863redispatch (deprecated) X - X X
864reqadd - X X X
865reqallow - X X X
866reqdel - X X X
867reqdeny - X X X
868reqiallow - X X X
869reqidel - X X X
870reqideny - X X X
871reqipass - X X X
872reqirep - X X X
873reqisetbe - X X X
874reqitarpit - X X X
875reqpass - X X X
876reqrep - X X X
877-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
878reqsetbe - X X X
879reqtarpit - X X X
880retries X - X X
881rspadd - X X X
882rspdel - X X X
883rspdeny - X X X
884rspidel - X X X
885rspideny - X X X
886rspirep - X X X
887rsprep - X X X
888server - - X X
889source X - X X
890srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
891stats auth X - X X
892stats enable X - X X
893stats hide-version X - X X
894stats realm X - X X
895stats refresh X - X X
896stats scope X - X X
897stats show-desc X - X X
898stats show-legends X - X X
899stats show-node X - X X
900stats uri X - X X
901-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
902stick match - - X X
903stick on - - X X
904stick store-request - - X X
905stick-table - - X X
906tcp-request content accept - X X -
907tcp-request content reject - X X -
908tcp-request inspect-delay - X X -
909timeout check X - X X
910timeout client X X X -
911timeout clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
912timeout connect X - X X
913timeout contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
914timeout http-keep-alive X X X X
915timeout http-request X X X X
916timeout queue X - X X
917timeout server X - X X
918timeout srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
919timeout tarpit X X X X
920transparent (deprecated) X - X X
921use_backend - X X -
922------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
923 keyword defaults frontend listen backend
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200924
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100925
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02009264.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
927---------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100928
929This section provides a description of each keyword and its usage.
930
931
932acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
933 Declare or complete an access list.
934 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
935 no | yes | yes | yes
936 Example:
937 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
938 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
939 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
940
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200941 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100942
943
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100944appsession <cookie> len <length> timeout <holdtime>
945 [request-learn] [prefix] [mode <path-parameters|query-string>]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100946 Define session stickiness on an existing application cookie.
947 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
948 no | no | yes | yes
949 Arguments :
950 <cookie> this is the name of the cookie used by the application and which
951 HAProxy will have to learn for each new session.
952
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100953 <length> this is the max number of characters that will be memorized and
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100954 checked in each cookie value.
955
956 <holdtime> this is the time after which the cookie will be removed from
957 memory if unused. If no unit is specified, this time is in
958 milliseconds.
959
Cyril Bontébf47aeb2009-10-15 00:15:40 +0200960 request-learn
961 If this option is specified, then haproxy will be able to learn
962 the cookie found in the request in case the server does not
963 specify any in response. This is typically what happens with
964 PHPSESSID cookies, or when haproxy's session expires before
965 the application's session and the correct server is selected.
966 It is recommended to specify this option to improve reliability.
967
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100968 prefix When this option is specified, haproxy will match on the cookie
969 prefix (or URL parameter prefix). The appsession value is the
970 data following this prefix.
971
972 Example :
973 appsession ASPSESSIONID len 64 timeout 3h prefix
974
975 This will match the cookie ASPSESSIONIDXXXX=XXXXX,
976 the appsession value will be XXXX=XXXXX.
977
978 mode This option allows to change the URL parser mode.
979 2 modes are currently supported :
980 - path-parameters :
981 The parser looks for the appsession in the path parameters
982 part (each parameter is separated by a semi-colon), which is
983 convenient for JSESSIONID for example.
984 This is the default mode if the option is not set.
985 - query-string :
986 In this mode, the parser will look for the appsession in the
987 query string.
988
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100989 When an application cookie is defined in a backend, HAProxy will check when
990 the server sets such a cookie, and will store its value in a table, and
991 associate it with the server's identifier. Up to <length> characters from
992 the value will be retained. On each connection, haproxy will look for this
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100993 cookie both in the "Cookie:" headers, and as a URL parameter (depending on
994 the mode used). If a known value is found, the client will be directed to the
995 server associated with this value. Otherwise, the load balancing algorithm is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100996 applied. Cookies are automatically removed from memory when they have been
997 unused for a duration longer than <holdtime>.
998
999 The definition of an application cookie is limited to one per backend.
1000
1001 Example :
1002 appsession JSESSIONID len 52 timeout 3h
1003
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01001004 See also : "cookie", "capture cookie", "balance", "stick" and "stick-table".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001005
1006
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +01001007backlog <conns>
1008 Give hints to the system about the approximate listen backlog desired size
1009 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1010 yes | yes | yes | no
1011 Arguments :
1012 <conns> is the number of pending connections. Depending on the operating
1013 system, it may represent the number of already acknowledged
1014 connections, of non-acknowledged ones, or both.
1015
1016 In order to protect against SYN flood attacks, one solution is to increase
1017 the system's SYN backlog size. Depending on the system, sometimes it is just
1018 tunable via a system parameter, sometimes it is not adjustable at all, and
1019 sometimes the system relies on hints given by the application at the time of
1020 the listen() syscall. By default, HAProxy passes the frontend's maxconn value
1021 to the listen() syscall. On systems which can make use of this value, it can
1022 sometimes be useful to be able to specify a different value, hence this
1023 backlog parameter.
1024
1025 On Linux 2.4, the parameter is ignored by the system. On Linux 2.6, it is
1026 used as a hint and the system accepts up to the smallest greater power of
1027 two, and never more than some limits (usually 32768).
1028
1029 See also : "maxconn" and the target operating system's tuning guide.
1030
1031
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001032balance <algorithm> [ <arguments> ]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001033balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001034 Define the load balancing algorithm to be used in a backend.
1035 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1036 yes | no | yes | yes
1037 Arguments :
1038 <algorithm> is the algorithm used to select a server when doing load
1039 balancing. This only applies when no persistence information
1040 is available, or when a connection is redispatched to another
1041 server. <algorithm> may be one of the following :
1042
1043 roundrobin Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1044 This is the smoothest and fairest algorithm when the server's
1045 processing time remains equally distributed. This algorithm
1046 is dynamic, which means that server weights may be adjusted
Willy Tarreau9757a382009-10-03 12:56:50 +02001047 on the fly for slow starts for instance. It is limited by
1048 design to 4128 active servers per backend. Note that in some
1049 large farms, when a server becomes up after having been down
1050 for a very short time, it may sometimes take a few hundreds
1051 requests for it to be re-integrated into the farm and start
1052 receiving traffic. This is normal, though very rare. It is
1053 indicated here in case you would have the chance to observe
1054 it, so that you don't worry.
1055
1056 static-rr Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1057 This algorithm is as similar to roundrobin except that it is
1058 static, which means that changing a server's weight on the
1059 fly will have no effect. On the other hand, it has no design
1060 limitation on the number of servers, and when a server goes
1061 up, it is always immediately reintroduced into the farm, once
1062 the full map is recomputed. It also uses slightly less CPU to
1063 run (around -1%).
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001064
Willy Tarreau2d2a7f82008-03-17 12:07:56 +01001065 leastconn The server with the lowest number of connections receives the
1066 connection. Round-robin is performed within groups of servers
1067 of the same load to ensure that all servers will be used. Use
1068 of this algorithm is recommended where very long sessions are
1069 expected, such as LDAP, SQL, TSE, etc... but is not very well
1070 suited for protocols using short sessions such as HTTP. This
1071 algorithm is dynamic, which means that server weights may be
1072 adjusted on the fly for slow starts for instance.
1073
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001074 source The source IP address is hashed and divided by the total
1075 weight of the running servers to designate which server will
1076 receive the request. This ensures that the same client IP
1077 address will always reach the same server as long as no
1078 server goes down or up. If the hash result changes due to the
1079 number of running servers changing, many clients will be
1080 directed to a different server. This algorithm is generally
1081 used in TCP mode where no cookie may be inserted. It may also
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001082 be used on the Internet to provide a best-effort stickiness
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001083 to clients which refuse session cookies. This algorithm is
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001084 static by default, which means that changing a server's
1085 weight on the fly will have no effect, but this can be
1086 changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001087
1088 uri The left part of the URI (before the question mark) is hashed
1089 and divided by the total weight of the running servers. The
1090 result designates which server will receive the request. This
1091 ensures that a same URI will always be directed to the same
1092 server as long as no server goes up or down. This is used
1093 with proxy caches and anti-virus proxies in order to maximize
1094 the cache hit rate. Note that this algorithm may only be used
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001095 in an HTTP backend. This algorithm is static by default,
1096 which means that changing a server's weight on the fly will
1097 have no effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001098
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001099 This algorithm support two optional parameters "len" and
1100 "depth", both followed by a positive integer number. These
1101 options may be helpful when it is needed to balance servers
1102 based on the beginning of the URI only. The "len" parameter
1103 indicates that the algorithm should only consider that many
1104 characters at the beginning of the URI to compute the hash.
1105 Note that having "len" set to 1 rarely makes sense since most
1106 URIs start with a leading "/".
1107
1108 The "depth" parameter indicates the maximum directory depth
1109 to be used to compute the hash. One level is counted for each
1110 slash in the request. If both parameters are specified, the
1111 evaluation stops when either is reached.
1112
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001113 url_param The URL parameter specified in argument will be looked up in
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001114 the query string of each HTTP GET request.
1115
1116 If the modifier "check_post" is used, then an HTTP POST
1117 request entity will be searched for the parameter argument,
1118 when the question mark indicating a query string ('?') is not
1119 present in the URL. Optionally, specify a number of octets to
1120 wait for before attempting to search the message body. If the
1121 entity can not be searched, then round robin is used for each
1122 request. For instance, if your clients always send the LB
1123 parameter in the first 128 bytes, then specify that. The
1124 default is 48. The entity data will not be scanned until the
1125 required number of octets have arrived at the gateway, this
1126 is the minimum of: (default/max_wait, Content-Length or first
1127 chunk length). If Content-Length is missing or zero, it does
1128 not need to wait for more data than the client promised to
1129 send. When Content-Length is present and larger than
1130 <max_wait>, then waiting is limited to <max_wait> and it is
1131 assumed that this will be enough data to search for the
1132 presence of the parameter. In the unlikely event that
1133 Transfer-Encoding: chunked is used, only the first chunk is
1134 scanned. Parameter values separated by a chunk boundary, may
1135 be randomly balanced if at all.
1136
1137 If the parameter is found followed by an equal sign ('=') and
1138 a value, then the value is hashed and divided by the total
1139 weight of the running servers. The result designates which
1140 server will receive the request.
1141
1142 This is used to track user identifiers in requests and ensure
1143 that a same user ID will always be sent to the same server as
1144 long as no server goes up or down. If no value is found or if
1145 the parameter is not found, then a round robin algorithm is
1146 applied. Note that this algorithm may only be used in an HTTP
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001147 backend. This algorithm is static by default, which means
1148 that changing a server's weight on the fly will have no
1149 effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001150
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001151 hdr(name) The HTTP header <name> will be looked up in each HTTP request.
1152 Just as with the equivalent ACL 'hdr()' function, the header
1153 name in parenthesis is not case sensitive. If the header is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001154 absent or if it does not contain any value, the roundrobin
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001155 algorithm is applied instead.
1156
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001157 An optional 'use_domain_only' parameter is available, for
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001158 reducing the hash algorithm to the main domain part with some
1159 specific headers such as 'Host'. For instance, in the Host
1160 value "haproxy.1wt.eu", only "1wt" will be considered.
1161
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001162 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1163 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1164 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1165
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001166 rdp-cookie
1167 rdp-cookie(name)
1168 The RDP cookie <name> (or "mstshash" if omitted) will be
1169 looked up and hashed for each incoming TCP request. Just as
1170 with the equivalent ACL 'req_rdp_cookie()' function, the name
1171 is not case-sensitive. This mechanism is useful as a degraded
1172 persistence mode, as it makes it possible to always send the
1173 same user (or the same session ID) to the same server. If the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001174 cookie is not found, the normal roundrobin algorithm is
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001175 used instead.
1176
1177 Note that for this to work, the frontend must ensure that an
1178 RDP cookie is already present in the request buffer. For this
1179 you must use 'tcp-request content accept' rule combined with
1180 a 'req_rdp_cookie_cnt' ACL.
1181
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001182 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1183 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1184 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1185
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001186 <arguments> is an optional list of arguments which may be needed by some
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001187 algorithms. Right now, only "url_param" and "uri" support an
1188 optional argument.
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001189
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001190 balance uri [len <len>] [depth <depth>]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001191 balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001192
Willy Tarreau3cd9af22009-03-15 14:06:41 +01001193 The load balancing algorithm of a backend is set to roundrobin when no other
1194 algorithm, mode nor option have been set. The algorithm may only be set once
1195 for each backend.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001196
1197 Examples :
1198 balance roundrobin
1199 balance url_param userid
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001200 balance url_param session_id check_post 64
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001201 balance hdr(User-Agent)
1202 balance hdr(host)
1203 balance hdr(Host) use_domain_only
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001204
1205 Note: the following caveats and limitations on using the "check_post"
1206 extension with "url_param" must be considered :
1207
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001208 - all POST requests are eligible for consideration, because there is no way
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001209 to determine if the parameters will be found in the body or entity which
1210 may contain binary data. Therefore another method may be required to
1211 restrict consideration of POST requests that have no URL parameters in
1212 the body. (see acl reqideny http_end)
1213
1214 - using a <max_wait> value larger than the request buffer size does not
1215 make sense and is useless. The buffer size is set at build time, and
1216 defaults to 16 kB.
1217
1218 - Content-Encoding is not supported, the parameter search will probably
1219 fail; and load balancing will fall back to Round Robin.
1220
1221 - Expect: 100-continue is not supported, load balancing will fall back to
1222 Round Robin.
1223
1224 - Transfer-Encoding (RFC2616 3.6.1) is only supported in the first chunk.
1225 If the entire parameter value is not present in the first chunk, the
1226 selection of server is undefined (actually, defined by how little
1227 actually appeared in the first chunk).
1228
1229 - This feature does not support generation of a 100, 411 or 501 response.
1230
1231 - In some cases, requesting "check_post" MAY attempt to scan the entire
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001232 contents of a message body. Scanning normally terminates when linear
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001233 white space or control characters are found, indicating the end of what
1234 might be a URL parameter list. This is probably not a concern with SGML
1235 type message bodies.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001236
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001237 See also : "dispatch", "cookie", "appsession", "transparent", "hash-type" and
1238 "http_proxy".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001239
1240
1241bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...]
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001242bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] interface <interface>
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001243bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] mss <maxseg>
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001244bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] transparent
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001245bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] id <id>
1246bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] name <name>
Willy Tarreau53319c92009-11-28 08:21:29 +01001247bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] defer-accept
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001248 Define one or several listening addresses and/or ports in a frontend.
1249 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1250 no | yes | yes | no
1251 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001252 <address> is optional and can be a host name, an IPv4 address, an IPv6
1253 address, or '*'. It designates the address the frontend will
1254 listen on. If unset, all IPv4 addresses of the system will be
1255 listened on. The same will apply for '*' or the system's
1256 special address "0.0.0.0".
1257
1258 <port> is the TCP port number the proxy will listen on. The port is
1259 mandatory. Note that in the case of an IPv6 address, the port
1260 is always the number after the last colon (':').
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001261
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001262 <interface> is an optional physical interface name. This is currently
1263 only supported on Linux. The interface must be a physical
1264 interface, not an aliased interface. When specified, all
1265 addresses on the same line will only be accepted if the
1266 incoming packet physically come through the designated
1267 interface. It is also possible to bind multiple frontends to
1268 the same address if they are bound to different interfaces.
1269 Note that binding to a physical interface requires root
1270 privileges.
1271
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001272 <maxseg> is an optional TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) value to be
1273 advertised on incoming connections. This can be used to force
1274 a lower MSS for certain specific ports, for instance for
1275 connections passing through a VPN. Note that this relies on a
1276 kernel feature which is theorically supported under Linux but
1277 was buggy in all versions prior to 2.6.28. It may or may not
1278 work on other operating systems. The commonly advertised
1279 value on Ethernet networks is 1460 = 1500(MTU) - 40(IP+TCP).
1280
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02001281 <id> is a persistent value for socket ID. Must be positive and
1282 unique in the proxy. An unused value will automatically be
1283 assigned if unset. Can only be used when defining only a
1284 single socket.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001285
1286 <name> is an optional name provided for stats
1287
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001288 transparent is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1289 Linux kernels. It indicates that the addresses will be bound
1290 even if they do not belong to the local machine. Any packet
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001291 targeting any of these addresses will be caught just as if
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001292 the address was locally configured. This normally requires
1293 that IP forwarding is enabled. Caution! do not use this with
1294 the default address '*', as it would redirect any traffic for
1295 the specified port. This keyword is available only when
1296 HAProxy is built with USE_LINUX_TPROXY=1.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001297
Willy Tarreaucb6cd432009-10-13 07:34:14 +02001298 defer_accept is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1299 Linux kernels. It states that a connection will only be
1300 accepted once some data arrive on it, or at worst after the
1301 first retransmit. This should be used only on protocols for
1302 which the client talks first (eg: HTTP). It can slightly
1303 improve performance by ensuring that most of the request is
1304 already available when the connection is accepted. On the
1305 other hand, it will not be able to detect connections which
1306 don't talk. It is important to note that this option is
1307 broken in all kernels up to 2.6.31, as the connection is
1308 never accepted until the client talks. This can cause issues
1309 with front firewalls which would see an established
1310 connection while the proxy will only see it in SYN_RECV.
1311
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001312 It is possible to specify a list of address:port combinations delimited by
1313 commas. The frontend will then listen on all of these addresses. There is no
1314 fixed limit to the number of addresses and ports which can be listened on in
1315 a frontend, as well as there is no limit to the number of "bind" statements
1316 in a frontend.
1317
1318 Example :
1319 listen http_proxy
1320 bind :80,:443
1321 bind 10.0.0.1:10080,10.0.0.1:10443
1322
1323 See also : "source".
1324
1325
Willy Tarreau0b9c02c2009-02-04 22:05:05 +01001326bind-process [ all | odd | even | <number 1-32> ] ...
1327 Limit visibility of an instance to a certain set of processes numbers.
1328 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1329 yes | yes | yes | yes
1330 Arguments :
1331 all All process will see this instance. This is the default. It
1332 may be used to override a default value.
1333
1334 odd This instance will be enabled on processes 1,3,5,...31. This
1335 option may be combined with other numbers.
1336
1337 even This instance will be enabled on processes 2,4,6,...32. This
1338 option may be combined with other numbers. Do not use it
1339 with less than 2 processes otherwise some instances might be
1340 missing from all processes.
1341
1342 number The instance will be enabled on this process number, between
1343 1 and 32. You must be careful not to reference a process
1344 number greater than the configured global.nbproc, otherwise
1345 some instances might be missing from all processes.
1346
1347 This keyword limits binding of certain instances to certain processes. This
1348 is useful in order not to have too many processes listening to the same
1349 ports. For instance, on a dual-core machine, it might make sense to set
1350 'nbproc 2' in the global section, then distributes the listeners among 'odd'
1351 and 'even' instances.
1352
1353 At the moment, it is not possible to reference more than 32 processes using
1354 this keyword, but this should be more than enough for most setups. Please
1355 note that 'all' really means all processes and is not limited to the first
1356 32.
1357
1358 If some backends are referenced by frontends bound to other processes, the
1359 backend automatically inherits the frontend's processes.
1360
1361 Example :
1362 listen app_ip1
1363 bind 10.0.0.1:80
1364 bind_process odd
1365
1366 listen app_ip2
1367 bind 10.0.0.2:80
1368 bind_process even
1369
1370 listen management
1371 bind 10.0.0.3:80
1372 bind_process 1 2 3 4
1373
1374 See also : "nbproc" in global section.
1375
1376
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001377block { if | unless } <condition>
1378 Block a layer 7 request if/unless a condition is matched
1379 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1380 no | yes | yes | yes
1381
1382 The HTTP request will be blocked very early in the layer 7 processing
1383 if/unless <condition> is matched. A 403 error will be returned if the request
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001384 is blocked. The condition has to reference ACLs (see section 7). This is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001385 typically used to deny access to certain sensible resources if some
1386 conditions are met or not met. There is no fixed limit to the number of
1387 "block" statements per instance.
1388
1389 Example:
1390 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
1391 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
1392 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
1393 block if invalid_src || local_dst
1394
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001395 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001396
1397
1398capture cookie <name> len <length>
1399 Capture and log a cookie in the request and in the response.
1400 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1401 no | yes | yes | no
1402 Arguments :
1403 <name> is the beginning of the name of the cookie to capture. In order
1404 to match the exact name, simply suffix the name with an equal
1405 sign ('='). The full name will appear in the logs, which is
1406 useful with application servers which adjust both the cookie name
1407 and value (eg: ASPSESSIONXXXXX).
1408
1409 <length> is the maximum number of characters to report in the logs, which
1410 include the cookie name, the equal sign and the value, all in the
1411 standard "name=value" form. The string will be truncated on the
1412 right if it exceeds <length>.
1413
1414 Only the first cookie is captured. Both the "cookie" request headers and the
1415 "set-cookie" response headers are monitored. This is particularly useful to
1416 check for application bugs causing session crossing or stealing between
1417 users, because generally the user's cookies can only change on a login page.
1418
1419 When the cookie was not presented by the client, the associated log column
1420 will report "-". When a request does not cause a cookie to be assigned by the
1421 server, a "-" is reported in the response column.
1422
1423 The capture is performed in the frontend only because it is necessary that
1424 the log format does not change for a given frontend depending on the
1425 backends. This may change in the future. Note that there can be only one
1426 "capture cookie" statement in a frontend. The maximum capture length is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001427 configured in the sources by default to 64 characters. It is not possible to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001428 specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1429
1430 Example:
1431 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
1432
1433 See also : "capture request header", "capture response header" as well as
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001434 section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001435
1436
1437capture request header <name> len <length>
1438 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified request header.
1439 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1440 no | yes | yes | no
1441 Arguments :
1442 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001443 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001444 appear in the requests, with the first letter of each word in
1445 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1446 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1447
1448 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1449 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1450 it exceeds <length>.
1451
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001452 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001453 value will be added to the logs between braces ('{}'). If multiple headers
1454 are captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar ('|') and will appear
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001455 in the same order they were declared in the configuration. Non-existent
1456 headers will be logged just as an empty string. Common uses for request
1457 header captures include the "Host" field in virtual hosting environments, the
1458 "Content-length" when uploads are supported, "User-agent" to quickly
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001459 differentiate between real users and robots, and "X-Forwarded-For" in proxied
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001460 environments to find where the request came from.
1461
1462 Note that when capturing headers such as "User-agent", some spaces may be
1463 logged, making the log analysis more difficult. Thus be careful about what
1464 you log if you know your log parser is not smart enough to rely on the
1465 braces.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001466
1467 There is no limit to the number of captured request headers, but each capture
1468 is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent for a
1469 same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It is not
1470 possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1471
1472 Example:
1473 capture request header Host len 15
1474 capture request header X-Forwarded-For len 15
1475 capture request header Referrer len 15
1476
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001477 See also : "capture cookie", "capture response header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001478 about logging.
1479
1480
1481capture response header <name> len <length>
1482 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified response header.
1483 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1484 no | yes | yes | no
1485 Arguments :
1486 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001487 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001488 appear in the response, with the first letter of each word in
1489 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1490 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1491
1492 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1493 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1494 it exceeds <length>.
1495
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001496 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001497 result will be added to the logs between braces ('{}') after the captured
1498 request headers. If multiple headers are captured, they will be delimited by
1499 a vertical bar ('|') and will appear in the same order they were declared in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001500 the configuration. Non-existent headers will be logged just as an empty
1501 string. Common uses for response header captures include the "Content-length"
1502 header which indicates how many bytes are expected to be returned, the
1503 "Location" header to track redirections.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001504
1505 There is no limit to the number of captured response headers, but each
1506 capture is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent
1507 for a same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It
1508 is not possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1509
1510 Example:
1511 capture response header Content-length len 9
1512 capture response header Location len 15
1513
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001514 See also : "capture cookie", "capture request header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001515 about logging.
1516
1517
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001518clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001519 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
1520 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1521 yes | yes | yes | no
1522 Arguments :
1523 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1524 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1525 as explained at the top of this document.
1526
1527 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
1528 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
1529 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
1530 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
1531 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
1532 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
1533 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
1534 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001535 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001536 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
1537 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
1538
1539 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
1540 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1541 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1542 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1543 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
1544 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1545
1546 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
1547 Please use "timeout client" instead.
1548
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01001549 See also : "timeout client", "timeout http-request", "timeout server", and
1550 "srvtimeout".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001551
1552
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001553contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001554 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
1555 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1556 yes | no | yes | yes
1557 Arguments :
1558 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1559 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1560 as explained at the top of this document.
1561
1562 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001563 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01001564 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001565 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
1566 connect timeout also presets the queue timeout to the same value if this one
1567 has not been specified. Historically, the contimeout was also used to set the
1568 tarpit timeout in a listen section, which is not possible in a pure frontend.
1569
1570 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
1571 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1572 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1573 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1574 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
1575 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1576
1577 This parameter is provided for backwards compatibility but is currently
1578 deprecated. Please use "timeout connect", "timeout queue" or "timeout tarpit"
1579 instead.
1580
1581 See also : "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout tarpit",
1582 "timeout server", "contimeout".
1583
1584
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02001585cookie <name> [ rewrite | insert | prefix ] [ indirect ] [ nocache ]
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001586 [ postonly ] [ domain <domain> ]*
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001587 Enable cookie-based persistence in a backend.
1588 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1589 yes | no | yes | yes
1590 Arguments :
1591 <name> is the name of the cookie which will be monitored, modified or
1592 inserted in order to bring persistence. This cookie is sent to
1593 the client via a "Set-Cookie" header in the response, and is
1594 brought back by the client in a "Cookie" header in all requests.
1595 Special care should be taken to choose a name which does not
1596 conflict with any likely application cookie. Also, if the same
1597 backends are subject to be used by the same clients (eg:
1598 HTTP/HTTPS), care should be taken to use different cookie names
1599 between all backends if persistence between them is not desired.
1600
1601 rewrite This keyword indicates that the cookie will be provided by the
1602 server and that haproxy will have to modify its value to set the
1603 server's identifier in it. This mode is handy when the management
1604 of complex combinations of "Set-cookie" and "Cache-control"
1605 headers is left to the application. The application can then
1606 decide whether or not it is appropriate to emit a persistence
1607 cookie. Since all responses should be monitored, this mode only
1608 works in HTTP close mode. Unless the application behaviour is
1609 very complex and/or broken, it is advised not to start with this
1610 mode for new deployments. This keyword is incompatible with
1611 "insert" and "prefix".
1612
1613 insert This keyword indicates that the persistence cookie will have to
1614 be inserted by haproxy in the responses. If the server emits a
1615 cookie with the same name, it will be replaced anyway. For this
1616 reason, this mode can be used to upgrade existing configurations
1617 running in the "rewrite" mode. The cookie will only be a session
1618 cookie and will not be stored on the client's disk. Due to
1619 caching effects, it is generally wise to add the "indirect" and
1620 "nocache" or "postonly" keywords (see below). The "insert"
1621 keyword is not compatible with "rewrite" and "prefix".
1622
1623 prefix This keyword indicates that instead of relying on a dedicated
1624 cookie for the persistence, an existing one will be completed.
1625 This may be needed in some specific environments where the client
1626 does not support more than one single cookie and the application
1627 already needs it. In this case, whenever the server sets a cookie
1628 named <name>, it will be prefixed with the server's identifier
1629 and a delimiter. The prefix will be removed from all client
1630 requests so that the server still finds the cookie it emitted.
1631 Since all requests and responses are subject to being modified,
1632 this mode requires the HTTP close mode. The "prefix" keyword is
1633 not compatible with "rewrite" and "insert".
1634
1635 indirect When this option is specified in insert mode, cookies will only
1636 be added when the server was not reached after a direct access,
1637 which means that only when a server is elected after applying a
1638 load-balancing algorithm, or after a redispatch, then the cookie
1639 will be inserted. If the client has all the required information
1640 to connect to the same server next time, no further cookie will
1641 be inserted. In all cases, when the "indirect" option is used in
1642 insert mode, the cookie is always removed from the requests
1643 transmitted to the server. The persistence mechanism then becomes
1644 totally transparent from the application point of view.
1645
1646 nocache This option is recommended in conjunction with the insert mode
1647 when there is a cache between the client and HAProxy, as it
1648 ensures that a cacheable response will be tagged non-cacheable if
1649 a cookie needs to be inserted. This is important because if all
1650 persistence cookies are added on a cacheable home page for
1651 instance, then all customers will then fetch the page from an
1652 outer cache and will all share the same persistence cookie,
1653 leading to one server receiving much more traffic than others.
1654 See also the "insert" and "postonly" options.
1655
1656 postonly This option ensures that cookie insertion will only be performed
1657 on responses to POST requests. It is an alternative to the
1658 "nocache" option, because POST responses are not cacheable, so
1659 this ensures that the persistence cookie will never get cached.
1660 Since most sites do not need any sort of persistence before the
1661 first POST which generally is a login request, this is a very
1662 efficient method to optimize caching without risking to find a
1663 persistence cookie in the cache.
1664 See also the "insert" and "nocache" options.
1665
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001666 domain This option allows to specify the domain at which a cookie is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001667 inserted. It requires exactly one parameter: a valid domain
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001668 name. If the domain begins with a dot, the browser is allowed to
1669 use it for any host ending with that name. It is also possible to
1670 specify several domain names by invoking this option multiple
1671 times. Some browsers might have small limits on the number of
1672 domains, so be careful when doing that. For the record, sending
1673 10 domains to MSIE 6 or Firefox 2 works as expected.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001674
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001675 There can be only one persistence cookie per HTTP backend, and it can be
1676 declared in a defaults section. The value of the cookie will be the value
1677 indicated after the "cookie" keyword in a "server" statement. If no cookie
1678 is declared for a given server, the cookie is not set.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001679
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001680 Examples :
1681 cookie JSESSIONID prefix
1682 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
1683 cookie SRV insert postonly indirect
1684
1685 See also : "appsession", "balance source", "capture cookie", "server".
1686
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001687
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001688default-server [param*]
1689 Change default options for a server in a backend
1690 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1691 yes | no | yes | yes
1692 Arguments:
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001693 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "default-server"
1694 keyword accepts an important number of options and has a complete
1695 section dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more
1696 details.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001697
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001698 Example :
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001699 default-server inter 1000 weight 13
1700
1701 See also: "server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001702
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001703
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001704default_backend <backend>
1705 Specify the backend to use when no "use_backend" rule has been matched.
1706 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1707 yes | yes | yes | no
1708 Arguments :
1709 <backend> is the name of the backend to use.
1710
1711 When doing content-switching between frontend and backends using the
1712 "use_backend" keyword, it is often useful to indicate which backend will be
1713 used when no rule has matched. It generally is the dynamic backend which
1714 will catch all undetermined requests.
1715
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001716 Example :
1717
1718 use_backend dynamic if url_dyn
1719 use_backend static if url_css url_img extension_img
1720 default_backend dynamic
1721
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001722 See also : "use_backend", "reqsetbe", "reqisetbe"
1723
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001724
1725disabled
1726 Disable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1727 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1728 yes | yes | yes | yes
1729 Arguments : none
1730
1731 The "disabled" keyword is used to disable an instance, mainly in order to
1732 liberate a listening port or to temporarily disable a service. The instance
1733 will still be created and its configuration will be checked, but it will be
1734 created in the "stopped" state and will appear as such in the statistics. It
1735 will not receive any traffic nor will it send any health-checks or logs. It
1736 is possible to disable many instances at once by adding the "disabled"
1737 keyword in a "defaults" section.
1738
1739 See also : "enabled"
1740
1741
1742enabled
1743 Enable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1744 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1745 yes | yes | yes | yes
1746 Arguments : none
1747
1748 The "enabled" keyword is used to explicitly enable an instance, when the
1749 defaults has been set to "disabled". This is very rarely used.
1750
1751 See also : "disabled"
1752
1753
1754errorfile <code> <file>
1755 Return a file contents instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1756 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1757 yes | yes | yes | yes
1758 Arguments :
1759 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1760 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1761
1762 <file> designates a file containing the full HTTP response. It is
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001763 recommended to follow the common practice of appending ".http" to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001764 the filename so that people do not confuse the response with HTML
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001765 error pages, and to use absolute paths, since files are read
1766 before any chroot is performed.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001767
1768 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1769 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1770 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1771
1772 The files are returned verbatim on the TCP socket. This allows any trick such
1773 as redirections to another URL or site, as well as tricks to clean cookies,
1774 force enable or disable caching, etc... The package provides default error
1775 files returning the same contents as default errors.
1776
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001777 The files should not exceed the configured buffer size (BUFSIZE), which
1778 generally is 8 or 16 kB, otherwise they will be truncated. It is also wise
1779 not to put any reference to local contents (eg: images) in order to avoid
1780 loops between the client and HAProxy when all servers are down, causing an
1781 error to be returned instead of an image. For better HTTP compliance, it is
1782 recommended that all header lines end with CR-LF and not LF alone.
1783
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001784 The files are read at the same time as the configuration and kept in memory.
1785 For this reason, the errors continue to be returned even when the process is
1786 chrooted, and no file change is considered while the process is running. A
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01001787 simple method for developing those files consists in associating them to the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001788 403 status code and interrogating a blocked URL.
1789
1790 See also : "errorloc", "errorloc302", "errorloc303"
1791
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001792 Example :
1793 errorfile 400 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/400badreq.http
1794 errorfile 403 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/403forbid.http
1795 errorfile 503 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/503sorry.http
1796
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001797
1798errorloc <code> <url>
1799errorloc302 <code> <url>
1800 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1801 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1802 yes | yes | yes | yes
1803 Arguments :
1804 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1805 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1806
1807 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1808 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1809 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1810 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1811 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1812
1813 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1814 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1815 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1816
1817 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 302 status code, which tells the
1818 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP method. This can be
1819 quite problematic in case of non-GET methods such as POST, because the URL
1820 sent to the client might not be allowed for something other than GET. To
1821 workaround this problem, please use "errorloc303" which send the HTTP 303
1822 status code, indicating to the client that the URL must be fetched with a GET
1823 request.
1824
1825 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc303"
1826
1827
1828errorloc303 <code> <url>
1829 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1830 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1831 yes | yes | yes | yes
1832 Arguments :
1833 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1834 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1835
1836 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1837 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1838 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1839 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1840 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1841
1842 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1843 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1844 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1845
1846 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 303 status code, which tells the
1847 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP GET method. This
1848 solves the usual problems associated with "errorloc" and the 302 code. It is
1849 possible that some very old browsers designed before HTTP/1.1 do not support
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001850 it, but no such problem has been reported till now.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001851
1852 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc", "errorloc302"
1853
1854
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01001855force-persist { if | unless } <condition>
1856 Declare a condition to force persistence on down servers
1857 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1858 no | yes | yes | yes
1859
1860 By default, requests are not dispatched to down servers. It is possible to
1861 force this using "option persist", but it is unconditional and redispatches
1862 to a valid server if "option redispatch" is set. That leaves with very little
1863 possibilities to force some requests to reach a server which is artificially
1864 marked down for maintenance operations.
1865
1866 The "force-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
1867 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore the down status of
1868 a server and still try to connect to it. That makes it possible to start a
1869 server, still replying an error to the health checks, and run a specially
1870 configured browser to test the service. Among the handy methods, one could
1871 use a specific source IP address, or a specific cookie. The cookie also has
1872 the advantage that it can easily be added/removed on the browser from a test
1873 page. Once the service is validated, it is then possible to open the service
1874 to the world by returning a valid response to health checks.
1875
1876 The forced persistence is enabled when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
1877 "unless" condition is met. The final redispatch is always disabled when this
1878 is used.
1879
1880 See also : "option redispatch", "persist", and section 7 about ACL usage.
1881
1882
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001883fullconn <conns>
1884 Specify at what backend load the servers will reach their maxconn
1885 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1886 yes | no | yes | yes
1887 Arguments :
1888 <conns> is the number of connections on the backend which will make the
1889 servers use the maximal number of connections.
1890
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001891 When a server has a "maxconn" parameter specified, it means that its number
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001892 of concurrent connections will never go higher. Additionally, if it has a
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001893 "minconn" parameter, it indicates a dynamic limit following the backend's
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001894 load. The server will then always accept at least <minconn> connections,
1895 never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on the ramp between both
1896 values when the backend has less than <conns> concurrent connections. This
1897 makes it possible to limit the load on the servers during normal loads, but
1898 push it further for important loads without overloading the servers during
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001899 exceptional loads.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001900
1901 Example :
1902 # The servers will accept between 100 and 1000 concurrent connections each
1903 # and the maximum of 1000 will be reached when the backend reaches 10000
1904 # connections.
1905 backend dynamic
1906 fullconn 10000
1907 server srv1 dyn1:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1908 server srv2 dyn2:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1909
1910 See also : "maxconn", "server"
1911
1912
1913grace <time>
1914 Maintain a proxy operational for some time after a soft stop
1915 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +01001916 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001917 Arguments :
1918 <time> is the time (by default in milliseconds) for which the instance
1919 will remain operational with the frontend sockets still listening
1920 when a soft-stop is received via the SIGUSR1 signal.
1921
1922 This may be used to ensure that the services disappear in a certain order.
1923 This was designed so that frontends which are dedicated to monitoring by an
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001924 external equipment fail immediately while other ones remain up for the time
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001925 needed by the equipment to detect the failure.
1926
1927 Note that currently, there is very little benefit in using this parameter,
1928 and it may in fact complicate the soft-reconfiguration process more than
1929 simplify it.
1930
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001931
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001932hash-type <method>
1933 Specify a method to use for mapping hashes to servers
1934 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1935 yes | no | yes | yes
1936 Arguments :
1937 map-based the hash table is a static array containing all alive servers.
1938 The hashes will be very smooth, will consider weights, but will
1939 be static in that weight changes while a server is up will be
1940 ignored. This means that there will be no slow start. Also,
1941 since a server is selected by its position in the array, most
1942 mappings are changed when the server count changes. This means
1943 that when a server goes up or down, or when a server is added
1944 to a farm, most connections will be redistributed to different
1945 servers. This can be inconvenient with caches for instance.
1946
1947 consistent the hash table is a tree filled with many occurrences of each
1948 server. The hash key is looked up in the tree and the closest
1949 server is chosen. This hash is dynamic, it supports changing
1950 weights while the servers are up, so it is compatible with the
1951 slow start feature. It has the advantage that when a server
1952 goes up or down, only its associations are moved. When a server
1953 is added to the farm, only a few part of the mappings are
1954 redistributed, making it an ideal algorithm for caches.
1955 However, due to its principle, the algorithm will never be very
1956 smooth and it may sometimes be necessary to adjust a server's
1957 weight or its ID to get a more balanced distribution. In order
1958 to get the same distribution on multiple load balancers, it is
1959 important that all servers have the same IDs.
1960
1961 The default hash type is "map-based" and is recommended for most usages.
1962
1963 See also : "balance", "server"
1964
1965
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001966http-check disable-on-404
1967 Enable a maintenance mode upon HTTP/404 response to health-checks
1968 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001969 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001970 Arguments : none
1971
1972 When this option is set, a server which returns an HTTP code 404 will be
1973 excluded from further load-balancing, but will still receive persistent
1974 connections. This provides a very convenient method for Web administrators
1975 to perform a graceful shutdown of their servers. It is also important to note
1976 that a server which is detected as failed while it was in this mode will not
1977 generate an alert, just a notice. If the server responds 2xx or 3xx again, it
1978 will immediately be reinserted into the farm. The status on the stats page
1979 reports "NOLB" for a server in this mode. It is important to note that this
1980 option only works in conjunction with the "httpchk" option.
1981
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001982 See also : "option httpchk"
1983
1984
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01001985http-check send-state
1986 Enable emission of a state header with HTTP health checks
1987 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1988 yes | no | yes | yes
1989 Arguments : none
1990
1991 When this option is set, haproxy will systematically send a special header
1992 "X-Haproxy-Server-State" with a list of parameters indicating to each server
1993 how they are seen by haproxy. This can be used for instance when a server is
1994 manipulated without access to haproxy and the operator needs to know whether
1995 haproxy still sees it up or not, or if the server is the last one in a farm.
1996
1997 The header is composed of fields delimited by semi-colons, the first of which
1998 is a word ("UP", "DOWN", "NOLB"), possibly followed by a number of valid
1999 checks on the total number before transition, just as appears in the stats
2000 interface. Next headers are in the form "<variable>=<value>", indicating in
2001 no specific order some values available in the stats interface :
2002 - a variable "name", containing the name of the backend followed by a slash
2003 ("/") then the name of the server. This can be used when a server is
2004 checked in multiple backends.
2005
2006 - a variable "node" containing the name of the haproxy node, as set in the
2007 global "node" variable, otherwise the system's hostname if unspecified.
2008
2009 - a variable "weight" indicating the weight of the server, a slash ("/")
2010 and the total weight of the farm (just counting usable servers). This
2011 helps to know if other servers are available to handle the load when this
2012 one fails.
2013
2014 - a variable "scur" indicating the current number of concurrent connections
2015 on the server, followed by a slash ("/") then the total number of
2016 connections on all servers of the same backend.
2017
2018 - a variable "qcur" indicating the current number of requests in the
2019 server's queue.
2020
2021 Example of a header received by the application server :
2022 >>> X-Haproxy-Server-State: UP 2/3; name=bck/srv2; node=lb1; weight=1/2; \
2023 scur=13/22; qcur=0
2024
2025 See also : "option httpchk", "http-check disable-on-404"
2026
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002027http-request { allow | deny | http-auth [realm <realm>] }
2028 [ { if | unless } <condition> ]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002029 Access control for Layer 7 requests
2030
2031 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2032 no | yes | yes | yes
2033
2034 These set of options allow to fine control access to a
2035 frontend/listen/backend. Each option may be followed by if/unless and acl.
2036 First option with matched condition (or option without condition) is final.
2037 For "block" a 403 error will be returned, for "allow" normal processing is
2038 performed, for "http-auth" a 401/407 error code is returned so the client
2039 should be asked to enter a username and password.
2040
2041 There is no fixed limit to the number of http-request statements per
2042 instance.
2043
2044 Example:
2045 acl nagios src 192.168.129.3
2046 acl local_net src 192.168.0.0/16
2047 acl auth_ok http_auth(L1)
2048
2049 http-request allow if nagios
2050 http-request allow if local_net auth_ok
2051 http-request auth realm Gimme if local_net auth_ok
2052 http-request deny
2053
2054 Exampe:
2055 acl auth_ok http_auth_group(L1) G1
2056
2057 http-request auth unless auth_ok
2058
2059 See section 3.4 about userlists and 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01002060
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002061id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02002062 Set a persistent ID to a proxy.
2063 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2064 no | yes | yes | yes
2065 Arguments : none
2066
2067 Set a persistent ID for the proxy. This ID must be unique and positive.
2068 An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first assigned
2069 value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002070
2071
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002072log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002073log <address> <facility> [<level> [<minlevel>]]
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002074 Enable per-instance logging of events and traffic.
2075 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2076 yes | yes | yes | yes
2077 Arguments :
2078 global should be used when the instance's logging parameters are the
2079 same as the global ones. This is the most common usage. "global"
2080 replaces <address>, <facility> and <level> with those of the log
2081 entries found in the "global" section. Only one "log global"
2082 statement may be used per instance, and this form takes no other
2083 parameter.
2084
2085 <address> indicates where to send the logs. It takes the same format as
2086 for the "global" section's logs, and can be one of :
2087
2088 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon (':') and a UDP
2089 port. If no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the
2090 standard syslog port).
2091
2092 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
2093 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible
2094 inside the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is
2095 appropriately writeable).
2096
2097 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
2098
2099 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
2100 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
2101 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
2102
2103 <level> is optional and can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By
2104 default, all messages are sent. If a level is specified, only
2105 messages with a severity at least as important as this level
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002106 will be sent. An optional minimum level can be specified. If it
2107 is set, logs emitted with a more severe level than this one will
2108 be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending "emerg"
2109 messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
2110 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002111
2112 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
2113
2114 Note that up to two "log" entries may be specified per instance. However, if
2115 "log global" is used and if the "global" section already contains 2 log
2116 entries, then additional log entries will be ignored.
2117
2118 Also, it is important to keep in mind that it is the frontend which decides
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002119 what to log from a connection, and that in case of content switching, the log
2120 entries from the backend will be ignored. Connections are logged at level
2121 "info".
2122
2123 However, backend log declaration define how and where servers status changes
2124 will be logged. Level "notice" will be used to indicate a server going up,
2125 "warning" will be used for termination signals and definitive service
2126 termination, and "alert" will be used for when a server goes down.
2127
2128 Note : According to RFC3164, messages are truncated to 1024 bytes before
2129 being emitted.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002130
2131 Example :
2132 log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002133 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice # only send important events
2134 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice notice # same but limit output level
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002135
2136
2137maxconn <conns>
2138 Fix the maximum number of concurrent connections on a frontend
2139 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2140 yes | yes | yes | no
2141 Arguments :
2142 <conns> is the maximum number of concurrent connections the frontend will
2143 accept to serve. Excess connections will be queued by the system
2144 in the socket's listen queue and will be served once a connection
2145 closes.
2146
2147 If the system supports it, it can be useful on big sites to raise this limit
2148 very high so that haproxy manages connection queues, instead of leaving the
2149 clients with unanswered connection attempts. This value should not exceed the
2150 global maxconn. Also, keep in mind that a connection contains two buffers
2151 of 8kB each, as well as some other data resulting in about 17 kB of RAM being
2152 consumed per established connection. That means that a medium system equipped
2153 with 1GB of RAM can withstand around 40000-50000 concurrent connections if
2154 properly tuned.
2155
2156 Also, when <conns> is set to large values, it is possible that the servers
2157 are not sized to accept such loads, and for this reason it is generally wise
2158 to assign them some reasonable connection limits.
2159
2160 See also : "server", global section's "maxconn", "fullconn"
2161
2162
2163mode { tcp|http|health }
2164 Set the running mode or protocol of the instance
2165 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2166 yes | yes | yes | yes
2167 Arguments :
2168 tcp The instance will work in pure TCP mode. A full-duplex connection
2169 will be established between clients and servers, and no layer 7
2170 examination will be performed. This is the default mode. It
2171 should be used for SSL, SSH, SMTP, ...
2172
2173 http The instance will work in HTTP mode. The client request will be
2174 analyzed in depth before connecting to any server. Any request
2175 which is not RFC-compliant will be rejected. Layer 7 filtering,
2176 processing and switching will be possible. This is the mode which
2177 brings HAProxy most of its value.
2178
2179 health The instance will work in "health" mode. It will just reply "OK"
2180 to incoming connections and close the connection. Nothing will be
2181 logged. This mode is used to reply to external components health
2182 checks. This mode is deprecated and should not be used anymore as
2183 it is possible to do the same and even better by combining TCP or
2184 HTTP modes with the "monitor" keyword.
2185
2186 When doing content switching, it is mandatory that the frontend and the
2187 backend are in the same mode (generally HTTP), otherwise the configuration
2188 will be refused.
2189
2190 Example :
2191 defaults http_instances
2192 mode http
2193
2194 See also : "monitor", "monitor-net"
2195
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002196
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002197monitor fail { if | unless } <condition>
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002198 Add a condition to report a failure to a monitor HTTP request.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002199 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2200 no | yes | yes | no
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002201 Arguments :
2202 if <cond> the monitor request will fail if the condition is satisfied,
2203 and will succeed otherwise. The condition should describe a
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002204 combined test which must induce a failure if all conditions
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002205 are met, for instance a low number of servers both in a
2206 backend and its backup.
2207
2208 unless <cond> the monitor request will succeed only if the condition is
2209 satisfied, and will fail otherwise. Such a condition may be
2210 based on a test on the presence of a minimum number of active
2211 servers in a list of backends.
2212
2213 This statement adds a condition which can force the response to a monitor
2214 request to report a failure. By default, when an external component queries
2215 the URI dedicated to monitoring, a 200 response is returned. When one of the
2216 conditions above is met, haproxy will return 503 instead of 200. This is
2217 very useful to report a site failure to an external component which may base
2218 routing advertisements between multiple sites on the availability reported by
2219 haproxy. In this case, one would rely on an ACL involving the "nbsrv"
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002220 criterion. Note that "monitor fail" only works in HTTP mode.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002221
2222 Example:
2223 frontend www
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002224 mode http
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002225 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
2226 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
2227 monitor-uri /site_alive
2228 monitor fail if site_dead
2229
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002230 See also : "monitor-net", "monitor-uri"
2231
2232
2233monitor-net <source>
2234 Declare a source network which is limited to monitor requests
2235 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2236 yes | yes | yes | no
2237 Arguments :
2238 <source> is the source IPv4 address or network which will only be able to
2239 get monitor responses to any request. It can be either an IPv4
2240 address, a host name, or an address followed by a slash ('/')
2241 followed by a mask.
2242
2243 In TCP mode, any connection coming from a source matching <source> will cause
2244 the connection to be immediately closed without any log. This allows another
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002245 equipment to probe the port and verify that it is still listening, without
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002246 forwarding the connection to a remote server.
2247
2248 In HTTP mode, a connection coming from a source matching <source> will be
2249 accepted, the following response will be sent without waiting for a request,
2250 then the connection will be closed : "HTTP/1.0 200 OK". This is normally
2251 enough for any front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and
2252 running without forwarding the request to a backend server.
2253
2254 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2255 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2256 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2257 nothing more. Right now, it is not possible to set failure conditions on
2258 requests caught by "monitor-net".
2259
2260 Example :
2261 # addresses .252 and .253 are just probing us.
2262 frontend www
2263 monitor-net 192.168.0.252/31
2264
2265 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-uri"
2266
2267
2268monitor-uri <uri>
2269 Intercept a URI used by external components' monitor requests
2270 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2271 yes | yes | yes | no
2272 Arguments :
2273 <uri> is the exact URI which we want to intercept to return HAProxy's
2274 health status instead of forwarding the request.
2275
2276 When an HTTP request referencing <uri> will be received on a frontend,
2277 HAProxy will not forward it nor log it, but instead will return either
2278 "HTTP/1.0 200 OK" or "HTTP/1.0 503 Service unavailable", depending on failure
2279 conditions defined with "monitor fail". This is normally enough for any
2280 front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and running without
2281 forwarding the request to a backend server. Note that the HTTP method, the
2282 version and all headers are ignored, but the request must at least be valid
2283 at the HTTP level. This keyword may only be used with an HTTP-mode frontend.
2284
2285 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2286 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2287 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2288 nothing more. However, it is possible to add any number of conditions using
2289 "monitor fail" and ACLs so that the result can be adjusted to whatever check
2290 can be imagined (most often the number of available servers in a backend).
2291
2292 Example :
2293 # Use /haproxy_test to report haproxy's status
2294 frontend www
2295 mode http
2296 monitor-uri /haproxy_test
2297
2298 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-net"
2299
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002300
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002301option abortonclose
2302no option abortonclose
2303 Enable or disable early dropping of aborted requests pending in queues.
2304 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2305 yes | no | yes | yes
2306 Arguments : none
2307
2308 In presence of very high loads, the servers will take some time to respond.
2309 The per-instance connection queue will inflate, and the response time will
2310 increase respective to the size of the queue times the average per-session
2311 response time. When clients will wait for more than a few seconds, they will
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002312 often hit the "STOP" button on their browser, leaving a useless request in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002313 the queue, and slowing down other users, and the servers as well, because the
2314 request will eventually be served, then aborted at the first error
2315 encountered while delivering the response.
2316
2317 As there is no way to distinguish between a full STOP and a simple output
2318 close on the client side, HTTP agents should be conservative and consider
2319 that the client might only have closed its output channel while waiting for
2320 the response. However, this introduces risks of congestion when lots of users
2321 do the same, and is completely useless nowadays because probably no client at
2322 all will close the session while waiting for the response. Some HTTP agents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002323 support this behaviour (Squid, Apache, HAProxy), and others do not (TUX, most
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002324 hardware-based load balancers). So the probability for a closed input channel
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002325 to represent a user hitting the "STOP" button is close to 100%, and the risk
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002326 of being the single component to break rare but valid traffic is extremely
2327 low, which adds to the temptation to be able to abort a session early while
2328 still not served and not pollute the servers.
2329
2330 In HAProxy, the user can choose the desired behaviour using the option
2331 "abortonclose". By default (without the option) the behaviour is HTTP
2332 compliant and aborted requests will be served. But when the option is
2333 specified, a session with an incoming channel closed will be aborted while
2334 it is still possible, either pending in the queue for a connection slot, or
2335 during the connection establishment if the server has not yet acknowledged
2336 the connection request. This considerably reduces the queue size and the load
2337 on saturated servers when users are tempted to click on STOP, which in turn
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002338 reduces the response time for other users.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002339
2340 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2341 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2342
2343 See also : "timeout queue" and server's "maxconn" and "maxqueue" parameters
2344
2345
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +02002346option accept-invalid-http-request
2347no option accept-invalid-http-request
2348 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP request parsing
2349 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2350 yes | yes | yes | no
2351 Arguments : none
2352
2353 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2354 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2355 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2356 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2357 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2358 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2359 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2360 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2361 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2362
2363 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2364 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2365 been confirmed.
2366
2367 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2368 requests, but the complete request will be captured in order to permit later
2369 analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket. Doing this
2370 also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2371
2372 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2373 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2374
2375 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-response" and "show errors" on the
2376 stats socket.
2377
2378
2379option accept-invalid-http-response
2380no option accept-invalid-http-response
2381 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP response parsing
2382 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2383 yes | no | yes | yes
2384 Arguments : none
2385
2386 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2387 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2388 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2389 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2390 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2391 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2392 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2393 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2394 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2395
2396 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2397 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2398 been confirmed.
2399
2400 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2401 responses, but the complete response will be captured in order to permit
2402 later analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket.
2403 Doing this also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2404
2405 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2406 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2407
2408 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-request" and "show errors" on the
2409 stats socket.
2410
2411
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002412option allbackups
2413no option allbackups
2414 Use either all backup servers at a time or only the first one
2415 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2416 yes | no | yes | yes
2417 Arguments : none
2418
2419 By default, the first operational backup server gets all traffic when normal
2420 servers are all down. Sometimes, it may be preferred to use multiple backups
2421 at once, because one will not be enough. When "option allbackups" is enabled,
2422 the load balancing will be performed among all backup servers when all normal
2423 ones are unavailable. The same load balancing algorithm will be used and the
2424 servers' weights will be respected. Thus, there will not be any priority
2425 order between the backup servers anymore.
2426
2427 This option is mostly used with static server farms dedicated to return a
2428 "sorry" page when an application is completely offline.
2429
2430 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2431 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2432
2433
2434option checkcache
2435no option checkcache
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002436 Analyze all server responses and block requests with cacheable cookies
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002437 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2438 yes | no | yes | yes
2439 Arguments : none
2440
2441 Some high-level frameworks set application cookies everywhere and do not
2442 always let enough control to the developer to manage how the responses should
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002443 be cached. When a session cookie is returned on a cacheable object, there is a
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002444 high risk of session crossing or stealing between users traversing the same
2445 caches. In some situations, it is better to block the response than to let
2446 some sensible session information go in the wild.
2447
2448 The option "checkcache" enables deep inspection of all server responses for
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002449 strict compliance with HTTP specification in terms of cacheability. It
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002450 carefully checks "Cache-control", "Pragma" and "Set-cookie" headers in server
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002451 response to check if there's a risk of caching a cookie on a client-side
2452 proxy. When this option is enabled, the only responses which can be delivered
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002453 to the client are :
2454 - all those without "Set-Cookie" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002455 - all those with a return code other than 200, 203, 206, 300, 301, 410,
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002456 provided that the server has not set a "Cache-control: public" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002457 - all those that come from a POST request, provided that the server has not
2458 set a 'Cache-Control: public' header ;
2459 - those with a 'Pragma: no-cache' header
2460 - those with a 'Cache-control: private' header
2461 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-store' header
2462 - those with a 'Cache-control: max-age=0' header
2463 - those with a 'Cache-control: s-maxage=0' header
2464 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache' header
2465 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie"' header
2466 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie,' header
2467 (allowing other fields after set-cookie)
2468
2469 If a response doesn't respect these requirements, then it will be blocked
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002470 just as if it was from an "rspdeny" filter, with an "HTTP 502 bad gateway".
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002471 The session state shows "PH--" meaning that the proxy blocked the response
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002472 during headers processing. Additionally, an alert will be sent in the logs so
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002473 that admins are informed that there's something to be fixed.
2474
2475 Due to the high impact on the application, the application should be tested
2476 in depth with the option enabled before going to production. It is also a
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002477 good practice to always activate it during tests, even if it is not used in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002478 production, as it will report potentially dangerous application behaviours.
2479
2480 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2481 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2482
2483
2484option clitcpka
2485no option clitcpka
2486 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the client side
2487 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2488 yes | yes | yes | no
2489 Arguments : none
2490
2491 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
2492 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
2493 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
2494 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
2495
2496 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
2497 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
2498 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
2499 operating system and its tuning parameters.
2500
2501 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
2502 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
2503 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
2504 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
2505 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
2506
2507 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
2508
2509 Using option "clitcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
2510 client side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
2511 noticed between HAProxy and a client.
2512
2513 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2514 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2515
2516 See also : "option srvtcpka", "option tcpka"
2517
2518
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002519option contstats
2520 Enable continuous traffic statistics updates
2521 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2522 yes | yes | yes | no
2523 Arguments : none
2524
2525 By default, counters used for statistics calculation are incremented
2526 only when a session finishes. It works quite well when serving small
2527 objects, but with big ones (for example large images or archives) or
2528 with A/V streaming, a graph generated from haproxy counters looks like
2529 a hedgehog. With this option enabled counters get incremented continuously,
2530 during a whole session. Recounting touches a hotpath directly so
2531 it is not enabled by default, as it has small performance impact (~0.5%).
2532
2533
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002534option dontlog-normal
2535no option dontlog-normal
2536 Enable or disable logging of normal, successful connections
2537 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2538 yes | yes | yes | no
2539 Arguments : none
2540
2541 There are large sites dealing with several thousand connections per second
2542 and for which logging is a major pain. Some of them are even forced to turn
2543 logs off and cannot debug production issues. Setting this option ensures that
2544 normal connections, those which experience no error, no timeout, no retry nor
2545 redispatch, will not be logged. This leaves disk space for anomalies. In HTTP
2546 mode, the response status code is checked and return codes 5xx will still be
2547 logged.
2548
2549 It is strongly discouraged to use this option as most of the time, the key to
2550 complex issues is in the normal logs which will not be logged here. If you
2551 need to separate logs, see the "log-separate-errors" option instead.
2552
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002553 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "log-separate-errors" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002554 logging.
2555
2556
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002557option dontlognull
2558no option dontlognull
2559 Enable or disable logging of null connections
2560 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2561 yes | yes | yes | no
2562 Arguments : none
2563
2564 In certain environments, there are components which will regularly connect to
2565 various systems to ensure that they are still alive. It can be the case from
2566 another load balancer as well as from monitoring systems. By default, even a
2567 simple port probe or scan will produce a log. If those connections pollute
2568 the logs too much, it is possible to enable option "dontlognull" to indicate
2569 that a connection on which no data has been transferred will not be logged,
2570 which typically corresponds to those probes.
2571
2572 It is generally recommended not to use this option in uncontrolled
2573 environments (eg: internet), otherwise scans and other malicious activities
2574 would not be logged.
2575
2576 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2577 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2578
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002579 See also : "log", "monitor-net", "monitor-uri" and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002580
2581
2582option forceclose
2583no option forceclose
2584 Enable or disable active connection closing after response is transferred.
2585 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaua31e5df2009-12-30 01:10:35 +01002586 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002587 Arguments : none
2588
2589 Some HTTP servers do not necessarily close the connections when they receive
2590 the "Connection: close" set by "option httpclose", and if the client does not
2591 close either, then the connection remains open till the timeout expires. This
2592 causes high number of simultaneous connections on the servers and shows high
2593 global session times in the logs.
2594
2595 When this happens, it is possible to use "option forceclose". It will
Willy Tarreau82eeaf22009-12-29 12:09:05 +01002596 actively close the outgoing server channel as soon as the server has finished
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002597 to respond. This option implicitly enables the "httpclose" option. Note that
2598 this option also enables the parsing of the full request and response, which
2599 means we can close the connection to the server very quickly, releasing some
2600 resources earlier than with httpclose.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002601
2602 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2603 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2604
2605 See also : "option httpclose"
2606
2607
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002608option forwardfor [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002609 Enable insertion of the X-Forwarded-For header to requests sent to servers
2610 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2611 yes | yes | yes | yes
2612 Arguments :
2613 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
2614 matching <network>
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002615 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Forwarded-For"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002616 header name.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002617
2618 Since HAProxy works in reverse-proxy mode, the servers see its IP address as
2619 their client address. This is sometimes annoying when the client's IP address
2620 is expected in server logs. To solve this problem, the well-known HTTP header
2621 "X-Forwarded-For" may be added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server.
2622 This header contains a value representing the client's IP address. Since this
2623 header is always appended at the end of the existing header list, the server
2624 must be configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. See
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002625 the server's manual to find how to enable use of this standard header. Note
2626 that only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
2627 possible that the client has already brought one.
2628
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002629 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002630 the default "X-Forwarded-For". This can be useful where you might already
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002631 have a "X-Forwarded-For" header from a different application (eg: stunnel),
2632 and you need preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002633 "X-Forwarded-For" header and requires different one (eg: Zeus Web Servers
2634 require "X-Cluster-Client-IP").
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002635
2636 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
2637 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
2638 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
2639 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
2640 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
2641 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
2642 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
2643
2644 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002645 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
2646 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
2647 both are defined.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002648
2649 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
2650 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
2651 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
2652 when using this option.
2653
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002654 Examples :
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002655 # Public HTTP address also used by stunnel on the same machine
2656 frontend www
2657 mode http
2658 option forwardfor except 127.0.0.1 # stunnel already adds the header
2659
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002660 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client
2661 backend www
2662 mode http
2663 option forwardfor header X-Client
2664
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002665 See also : "option httpclose"
2666
2667
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002668option http-server-close
2669no option http-server-close
2670 Enable or disable HTTP connection closing on the server side
2671 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2672 yes | yes | yes | yes
2673 Arguments : none
2674
2675 This mode enables HTTP connection-close mode on the server side while keeping
2676 the ability to support HTTP keep-alive and pipelining on the client side.
2677 This provides the lowest latency on the client side (slow network) and the
2678 fastest session reuse on the server side to save server resources, similarly
2679 to "option forceclose". It also permits non-keepalive capable servers to be
2680 served in keep-alive mode to the clients if they conform to the requirements
2681 of RFC2616.
2682
2683 At the moment, logs will not indicate whether requests came from the same
2684 session or not. The accept date reported in the logs corresponds to the end
2685 of the previous request, and the request time corresponds to the time spent
2686 waiting for a new request. The keep-alive request time is still bound to the
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01002687 timeout defined by "timeout http-keep-alive" or "timeout http-request" if
2688 not set.
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002689
2690 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2691 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002692 It is worth noting that "option forceclose" has precedence over "option
2693 http-server-close" and that combining "http-server-close" with "httpclose"
2694 basically achieve the same result as "forceclose".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002695
2696 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2697 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2698
2699 See also : "option forceclose" and "option httpclose"
2700
2701
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002702option http-use-proxy-header
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002703no option http-use-proxy-header
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002704 Make use of non-standard Proxy-Connection header instead of Connection
2705 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2706 yes | yes | yes | no
2707 Arguments : none
2708
2709 While RFC2616 explicitly states that HTTP/1.1 agents must use the
2710 Connection header to indicate their wish of persistent or non-persistent
2711 connections, both browsers and proxies ignore this header for proxied
2712 connections and make use of the undocumented, non-standard Proxy-Connection
2713 header instead. The issue begins when trying to put a load balancer between
2714 browsers and such proxies, because there will be a difference between what
2715 haproxy understands and what the client and the proxy agree on.
2716
2717 By setting this option in a frontend, haproxy can automatically switch to use
2718 that non-standard header if it sees proxied requests. A proxied request is
2719 defined here as one where the URI begins with neither a '/' nor a '*'. The
2720 choice of header only affects requests passing through proxies making use of
2721 one of the "httpclose", "forceclose" and "http-server-close" options. Note
2722 that this option can only be specified in a frontend and will affect the
2723 request along its whole life.
2724
Willy Tarreau844a7e72010-01-31 21:46:18 +01002725 Also, when this option is set, a request which requires authentication will
2726 automatically switch to use proxy authentication headers if it is itself a
2727 proxied request. That makes it possible to check or enforce authentication in
2728 front of an existing proxy.
2729
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002730 This option should normally never be used, except in front of a proxy.
2731
2732 See also : "option httpclose", "option forceclose" and "option
2733 http-server-close".
2734
2735
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01002736option httpchk
2737option httpchk <uri>
2738option httpchk <method> <uri>
2739option httpchk <method> <uri> <version>
2740 Enable HTTP protocol to check on the servers health
2741 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2742 yes | no | yes | yes
2743 Arguments :
2744 <method> is the optional HTTP method used with the requests. When not set,
2745 the "OPTIONS" method is used, as it generally requires low server
2746 processing and is easy to filter out from the logs. Any method
2747 may be used, though it is not recommended to invent non-standard
2748 ones.
2749
2750 <uri> is the URI referenced in the HTTP requests. It defaults to " / "
2751 which is accessible by default on almost any server, but may be
2752 changed to any other URI. Query strings are permitted.
2753
2754 <version> is the optional HTTP version string. It defaults to "HTTP/1.0"
2755 but some servers might behave incorrectly in HTTP 1.0, so turning
2756 it to HTTP/1.1 may sometimes help. Note that the Host field is
2757 mandatory in HTTP/1.1, and as a trick, it is possible to pass it
2758 after "\r\n" following the version string.
2759
2760 By default, server health checks only consist in trying to establish a TCP
2761 connection. When "option httpchk" is specified, a complete HTTP request is
2762 sent once the TCP connection is established, and responses 2xx and 3xx are
2763 considered valid, while all other ones indicate a server failure, including
2764 the lack of any response.
2765
2766 The port and interval are specified in the server configuration.
2767
2768 This option does not necessarily require an HTTP backend, it also works with
2769 plain TCP backends. This is particularly useful to check simple scripts bound
2770 to some dedicated ports using the inetd daemon.
2771
2772 Examples :
2773 # Relay HTTPS traffic to Apache instance and check service availability
2774 # using HTTP request "OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1" on port 80.
2775 backend https_relay
2776 mode tcp
2777 option httpchk OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1\r\nHost:\ www
2778 server apache1 192.168.1.1:443 check port 80
2779
2780 See also : "option ssl-hello-chk", "option smtpchk", "option mysql-check",
2781 "http-check" and the "check", "port" and "inter" server options.
2782
2783
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002784option httpclose
2785no option httpclose
2786 Enable or disable passive HTTP connection closing
2787 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2788 yes | yes | yes | yes
2789 Arguments : none
2790
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002791 As stated in section 1, HAProxy does not yes support the HTTP keep-alive
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002792 mode. So by default, if a client communicates with a server in this mode, it
2793 will only analyze, log, and process the first request of each connection. To
2794 workaround this limitation, it is possible to specify "option httpclose". It
2795 will check if a "Connection: close" header is already set in each direction,
2796 and will add one if missing. Each end should react to this by actively
2797 closing the TCP connection after each transfer, thus resulting in a switch to
2798 the HTTP close mode. Any "Connection" header different from "close" will also
2799 be removed.
2800
2801 It seldom happens that some servers incorrectly ignore this header and do not
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002802 close the connection eventhough they reply "Connection: close". For this
2803 reason, they are not compatible with older HTTP 1.0 browsers. If this happens
2804 it is possible to use the "option forceclose" which actively closes the
2805 request connection once the server responds. Option "forceclose" also
2806 releases the server connection earlier because it does not have to wait for
2807 the client to acknowledge it.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002808
2809 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2810 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2811 If "option forceclose" is specified too, it has precedence over "httpclose".
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002812 If "option http-server-close" is enabled at the same time as "httpclose", it
2813 basically achieves the same result as "option forceclose".
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002814
2815 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2816 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2817
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002818 See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002819
2820
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002821option httplog [ clf ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002822 Enable logging of HTTP request, session state and timers
2823 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2824 yes | yes | yes | yes
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002825 Arguments :
2826 clf if the "clf" argument is added, then the output format will be
2827 the CLF format instead of HAProxy's default HTTP format. You can
2828 use this when you need to feed HAProxy's logs through a specific
2829 log analyser which only support the CLF format and which is not
2830 extensible.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002831
2832 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
2833 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
2834 "option httplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including,
2835 but not limited to, the HTTP request, the connection timers, the session
2836 status, the connections numbers, the captured headers and cookies, the
2837 frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source address and
2838 ports.
2839
2840 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
2841
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002842 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2843 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it. Specifying
2844 only "option httplog" will automatically clear the 'clf' mode if it was set
2845 by default.
2846
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002847 See also : section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002848
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02002849
2850option http_proxy
2851no option http_proxy
2852 Enable or disable plain HTTP proxy mode
2853 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2854 yes | yes | yes | yes
2855 Arguments : none
2856
2857 It sometimes happens that people need a pure HTTP proxy which understands
2858 basic proxy requests without caching nor any fancy feature. In this case,
2859 it may be worth setting up an HAProxy instance with the "option http_proxy"
2860 set. In this mode, no server is declared, and the connection is forwarded to
2861 the IP address and port found in the URL after the "http://" scheme.
2862
2863 No host address resolution is performed, so this only works when pure IP
2864 addresses are passed. Since this option's usage perimeter is rather limited,
2865 it will probably be used only by experts who know they need exactly it. Last,
2866 if the clients are susceptible of sending keep-alive requests, it will be
2867 needed to add "option http_close" to ensure that all requests will correctly
2868 be analyzed.
2869
2870 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2871 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2872
2873 Example :
2874 # this backend understands HTTP proxy requests and forwards them directly.
2875 backend direct_forward
2876 option httpclose
2877 option http_proxy
2878
2879 See also : "option httpclose"
2880
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002881
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +02002882option independant-streams
2883no option independant-streams
2884 Enable or disable independant timeout processing for both directions
2885 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2886 yes | yes | yes | yes
2887 Arguments : none
2888
2889 By default, when data is sent over a socket, both the write timeout and the
2890 read timeout for that socket are refreshed, because we consider that there is
2891 activity on that socket, and we have no other means of guessing if we should
2892 receive data or not.
2893
2894 While this default behaviour is desirable for almost all applications, there
2895 exists a situation where it is desirable to disable it, and only refresh the
2896 read timeout if there are incoming data. This happens on sessions with large
2897 timeouts and low amounts of exchanged data such as telnet session. If the
2898 server suddenly disappears, the output data accumulates in the system's
2899 socket buffers, both timeouts are correctly refreshed, and there is no way
2900 to know the server does not receive them, so we don't timeout. However, when
2901 the underlying protocol always echoes sent data, it would be enough by itself
2902 to detect the issue using the read timeout. Note that this problem does not
2903 happen with more verbose protocols because data won't accumulate long in the
2904 socket buffers.
2905
2906 When this option is set on the frontend, it will disable read timeout updates
2907 on data sent to the client. There probably is little use of this case. When
2908 the option is set on the backend, it will disable read timeout updates on
2909 data sent to the server. Doing so will typically break large HTTP posts from
2910 slow lines, so use it with caution.
2911
2912 See also : "timeout client" and "timeout server"
2913
2914
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002915option log-health-checks
2916no option log-health-checks
2917 Enable or disable logging of health checks
2918 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2919 yes | no | yes | yes
2920 Arguments : none
2921
2922 Enable health checks logging so it possible to check for example what
2923 was happening before a server crash. Failed health check are logged if
2924 server is UP and succeeded health checks if server is DOWN, so the amount
2925 of additional information is limited.
2926
2927 If health check logging is enabled no health check status is printed
2928 when servers is set up UP/DOWN/ENABLED/DISABLED.
2929
2930 See also: "log" and section 8 about logging.
2931
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002932
2933option log-separate-errors
2934no option log-separate-errors
2935 Change log level for non-completely successful connections
2936 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2937 yes | yes | yes | no
2938 Arguments : none
2939
2940 Sometimes looking for errors in logs is not easy. This option makes haproxy
2941 raise the level of logs containing potentially interesting information such
2942 as errors, timeouts, retries, redispatches, or HTTP status codes 5xx. The
2943 level changes from "info" to "err". This makes it possible to log them
2944 separately to a different file with most syslog daemons. Be careful not to
2945 remove them from the original file, otherwise you would lose ordering which
2946 provides very important information.
2947
2948 Using this option, large sites dealing with several thousand connections per
2949 second may log normal traffic to a rotating buffer and only archive smaller
2950 error logs.
2951
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002952 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "dontlog-normal" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002953 logging.
2954
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002955
2956option logasap
2957no option logasap
2958 Enable or disable early logging of HTTP requests
2959 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2960 yes | yes | yes | no
2961 Arguments : none
2962
2963 By default, HTTP requests are logged upon termination so that the total
2964 transfer time and the number of bytes appear in the logs. When large objects
2965 are being transferred, it may take a while before the request appears in the
2966 logs. Using "option logasap", the request gets logged as soon as the server
2967 sends the complete headers. The only missing information in the logs will be
2968 the total number of bytes which will indicate everything except the amount
2969 of data transferred, and the total time which will not take the transfer
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002970 time into account. In such a situation, it's a good practice to capture the
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002971 "Content-Length" response header so that the logs at least indicate how many
2972 bytes are expected to be transferred.
2973
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002974 Examples :
2975 listen http_proxy 0.0.0.0:80
2976 mode http
2977 option httplog
2978 option logasap
2979 log 192.168.2.200 local3
2980
2981 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
2982 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
2983 static/srv1 9/10/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/1/1/1/0 1/0 \
2984 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
2985
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002986 See also : "option httplog", "capture response header", and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002987 logging.
2988
2989
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01002990option mysql-check
2991 Use Mysql health checks for server testing
2992 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2993 yes | no | yes | yes
2994 Arguments : none
2995
2996 The check consists in parsing Mysql Handshake Initialisation packet or Error
2997 packet, which is sent by MySQL server on connect. It is a basic but useful
2998 test which does not produce any logging on the server. However, it does not
2999 check database presence nor database consistency, nor user permission to
3000 access. To do this, you can use an external check with xinetd for example.
3001
3002 Most often, an incoming MySQL server needs to see the client's IP address for
3003 various purposes, including IP privilege matching and connection logging.
3004 When possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3005 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3006 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in, and the MySQL server
3007 to route the client via the machine hosting haproxy.
3008
3009 See also: "option httpchk"
3010
3011
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003012option nolinger
3013no option nolinger
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003014 Enable or disable immediate session resource cleaning after close
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003015 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3016 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003017 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003018
3019 When clients or servers abort connections in a dirty way (eg: they are
3020 physically disconnected), the session timeouts triggers and the session is
3021 closed. But it will remain in FIN_WAIT1 state for some time in the system,
3022 using some resources and possibly limiting the ability to establish newer
3023 connections.
3024
3025 When this happens, it is possible to activate "option nolinger" which forces
3026 the system to immediately remove any socket's pending data on close. Thus,
3027 the session is instantly purged from the system's tables. This usually has
3028 side effects such as increased number of TCP resets due to old retransmits
3029 getting immediately rejected. Some firewalls may sometimes complain about
3030 this too.
3031
3032 For this reason, it is not recommended to use this option when not absolutely
3033 needed. You know that you need it when you have thousands of FIN_WAIT1
3034 sessions on your system (TIME_WAIT ones do not count).
3035
3036 This option may be used both on frontends and backends, depending on the side
3037 where it is required. Use it on the frontend for clients, and on the backend
3038 for servers.
3039
3040 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3041 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3042
3043
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02003044option originalto [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
3045 Enable insertion of the X-Original-To header to requests sent to servers
3046 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3047 yes | yes | yes | yes
3048 Arguments :
3049 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
3050 matching <network>
3051 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Original-To"
3052 header name.
3053
3054 Since HAProxy can work in transparent mode, every request from a client can
3055 be redirected to the proxy and HAProxy itself can proxy every request to a
3056 complex SQUID environment and the destination host from SO_ORIGINAL_DST will
3057 be lost. This is annoying when you want access rules based on destination ip
3058 addresses. To solve this problem, a new HTTP header "X-Original-To" may be
3059 added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server. This header contains a
3060 value representing the original destination IP address. Since this must be
3061 configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. Note that
3062 only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
3063 possible that the client has already brought one.
3064
3065 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
3066 the default "X-Original-To". This can be useful where you might already
3067 have a "X-Original-To" header from a different application, and you need
3068 preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the "X-Original-To"
3069 header and requires different one.
3070
3071 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
3072 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
3073 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
3074 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
3075 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
3076 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
3077 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
3078
3079 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
3080 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
3081 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
3082 both are defined.
3083
3084 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
3085 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
3086 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
3087 when using this option.
3088
3089 Examples :
3090 # Original Destination address
3091 frontend www
3092 mode http
3093 option originalto except 127.0.0.1
3094
3095 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client-Dst
3096 backend www
3097 mode http
3098 option originalto header X-Client-Dst
3099
3100 See also : "option httpclose"
3101
3102
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003103option persist
3104no option persist
3105 Enable or disable forced persistence on down servers
3106 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3107 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003108 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003109
3110 When an HTTP request reaches a backend with a cookie which references a dead
3111 server, by default it is redispatched to another server. It is possible to
3112 force the request to be sent to the dead server first using "option persist"
3113 if absolutely needed. A common use case is when servers are under extreme
3114 load and spend their time flapping. In this case, the users would still be
3115 directed to the server they opened the session on, in the hope they would be
3116 correctly served. It is recommended to use "option redispatch" in conjunction
3117 with this option so that in the event it would not be possible to connect to
3118 the server at all (server definitely dead), the client would finally be
3119 redirected to another valid server.
3120
3121 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3122 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3123
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003124 See also : "option redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003125
3126
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003127option redispatch
3128no option redispatch
3129 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3130 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3131 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003132 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003133
3134 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3135 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3136 be able to access the service anymore.
3137
3138 Specifying "option redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their
3139 persistence and redistribute them to a working server.
3140
3141 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3142 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3143 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003144
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003145 This form is the preferred form, which replaces both the "redispatch" and
3146 "redisp" keywords.
3147
3148 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3149 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3150
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003151 See also : "redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003152
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003153
3154option smtpchk
3155option smtpchk <hello> <domain>
3156 Use SMTP health checks for server testing
3157 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3158 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003159 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003160 <hello> is an optional argument. It is the "hello" command to use. It can
3161 be either "HELO" (for SMTP) or "EHLO" (for ESTMP). All other
3162 values will be turned into the default command ("HELO").
3163
3164 <domain> is the domain name to present to the server. It may only be
3165 specified (and is mandatory) if the hello command has been
3166 specified. By default, "localhost" is used.
3167
3168 When "option smtpchk" is set, the health checks will consist in TCP
3169 connections followed by an SMTP command. By default, this command is
3170 "HELO localhost". The server's return code is analyzed and only return codes
3171 starting with a "2" will be considered as valid. All other responses,
3172 including a lack of response will constitute an error and will indicate a
3173 dead server.
3174
3175 This test is meant to be used with SMTP servers or relays. Depending on the
3176 request, it is possible that some servers do not log each connection attempt,
3177 so you may want to experiment to improve the behaviour. Using telnet on port
3178 25 is often easier than adjusting the configuration.
3179
3180 Most often, an incoming SMTP server needs to see the client's IP address for
3181 various purposes, including spam filtering, anti-spoofing and logging. When
3182 possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3183 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3184 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in.
3185
3186 Example :
3187 option smtpchk HELO mydomain.org
3188
3189 See also : "option httpchk", "source"
3190
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003191
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02003192option socket-stats
3193no option socket-stats
3194
3195 Enable or disable collecting & providing separate statistics for each socket.
3196 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3197 yes | yes | yes | no
3198
3199 Arguments : none
3200
3201
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003202option splice-auto
3203no option splice-auto
3204 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets in both directions
3205 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3206 yes | yes | yes | yes
3207 Arguments : none
3208
3209 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3210 will automatically evaluate the opportunity to use kernel tcp splicing to
3211 forward data between the client and the server, in either direction. Haproxy
3212 uses heuristics to estimate if kernel splicing might improve performance or
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003213 not. Both directions are handled independently. Note that the heuristics used
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003214 are not much aggressive in order to limit excessive use of splicing. This
3215 option requires splicing to be enabled at compile time, and may be globally
3216 disabled with the global option "nosplice". Since splice uses pipes, using it
3217 requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3218
3219 Important note: kernel-based TCP splicing is a Linux-specific feature which
3220 first appeared in kernel 2.6.25. It offers kernel-based acceleration to
3221 transfer data between sockets without copying these data to user-space, thus
3222 providing noticeable performance gains and CPU cycles savings. Since many
3223 early implementations are buggy, corrupt data and/or are inefficient, this
3224 feature is not enabled by default, and it should be used with extreme care.
3225 While it is not possible to detect the correctness of an implementation,
3226 2.6.29 is the first version offering a properly working implementation. In
3227 case of doubt, splicing may be globally disabled using the global "nosplice"
3228 keyword.
3229
3230 Example :
3231 option splice-auto
3232
3233 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3234 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3235
3236 See also : "option splice-request", "option splice-response", and global
3237 options "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3238
3239
3240option splice-request
3241no option splice-request
3242 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for requests
3243 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3244 yes | yes | yes | yes
3245 Arguments : none
3246
3247 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3248 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3249 the client to the server. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3250 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3251 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3252 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3253
3254 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3255
3256 Example :
3257 option splice-request
3258
3259 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3260 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3261
3262 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-response", and global options
3263 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3264
3265
3266option splice-response
3267no option splice-response
3268 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for responses
3269 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3270 yes | yes | yes | yes
3271 Arguments : none
3272
3273 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3274 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3275 the server to the client. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3276 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3277 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3278 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3279
3280 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3281
3282 Example :
3283 option splice-response
3284
3285 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3286 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3287
3288 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-request", and global options
3289 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3290
3291
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003292option srvtcpka
3293no option srvtcpka
3294 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the server side
3295 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3296 yes | no | yes | yes
3297 Arguments : none
3298
3299 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3300 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3301 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3302 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3303
3304 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3305 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3306 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3307 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3308
3309 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3310 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3311 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3312 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3313 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3314
3315 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3316
3317 Using option "srvtcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
3318 server side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
3319 noticed between HAProxy and a server.
3320
3321 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3322 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3323
3324 See also : "option clitcpka", "option tcpka"
3325
3326
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003327option ssl-hello-chk
3328 Use SSLv3 client hello health checks for server testing
3329 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3330 yes | no | yes | yes
3331 Arguments : none
3332
3333 When some SSL-based protocols are relayed in TCP mode through HAProxy, it is
3334 possible to test that the server correctly talks SSL instead of just testing
3335 that it accepts the TCP connection. When "option ssl-hello-chk" is set, pure
3336 SSLv3 client hello messages are sent once the connection is established to
3337 the server, and the response is analyzed to find an SSL server hello message.
3338 The server is considered valid only when the response contains this server
3339 hello message.
3340
3341 All servers tested till there correctly reply to SSLv3 client hello messages,
3342 and most servers tested do not even log the requests containing only hello
3343 messages, which is appreciable.
3344
3345 See also: "option httpchk"
3346
3347
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003348option tcp-smart-accept
3349no option tcp-smart-accept
3350 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the accept sequence
3351 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3352 yes | yes | yes | no
3353 Arguments : none
3354
3355 When an HTTP connection request comes in, the system acknowledges it on
3356 behalf of HAProxy, then the client immediately sends its request, and the
3357 system acknowledges it too while it is notifying HAProxy about the new
3358 connection. HAProxy then reads the request and responds. This means that we
3359 have one TCP ACK sent by the system for nothing, because the request could
3360 very well be acknowledged by HAProxy when it sends its response.
3361
3362 For this reason, in HTTP mode, HAProxy automatically asks the system to avoid
3363 sending this useless ACK on platforms which support it (currently at least
3364 Linux). It must not cause any problem, because the system will send it anyway
3365 after 40 ms if the response takes more time than expected to come.
3366
3367 During complex network debugging sessions, it may be desirable to disable
3368 this optimization because delayed ACKs can make troubleshooting more complex
3369 when trying to identify where packets are delayed. It is then possible to
3370 fall back to normal behaviour by specifying "no option tcp-smart-accept".
3371
3372 It is also possible to force it for non-HTTP proxies by simply specifying
3373 "option tcp-smart-accept". For instance, it can make sense with some services
3374 such as SMTP where the server speaks first.
3375
3376 It is recommended to avoid forcing this option in a defaults section. In case
3377 of doubt, consider setting it back to automatic values by prepending the
3378 "default" keyword before it, or disabling it using the "no" keyword.
3379
Willy Tarreaud88edf22009-06-14 15:48:17 +02003380 See also : "option tcp-smart-connect"
3381
3382
3383option tcp-smart-connect
3384no option tcp-smart-connect
3385 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the connect sequence
3386 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3387 yes | no | yes | yes
3388 Arguments : none
3389
3390 On certain systems (at least Linux), HAProxy can ask the kernel not to
3391 immediately send an empty ACK upon a connection request, but to directly
3392 send the buffer request instead. This saves one packet on the network and
3393 thus boosts performance. It can also be useful for some servers, because they
3394 immediately get the request along with the incoming connection.
3395
3396 This feature is enabled when "option tcp-smart-connect" is set in a backend.
3397 It is not enabled by default because it makes network troubleshooting more
3398 complex.
3399
3400 It only makes sense to enable it with protocols where the client speaks first
3401 such as HTTP. In other situations, if there is no data to send in place of
3402 the ACK, a normal ACK is sent.
3403
3404 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3405 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3406
3407 See also : "option tcp-smart-accept"
3408
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003409
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003410option tcpka
3411 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on both sides
3412 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3413 yes | yes | yes | yes
3414 Arguments : none
3415
3416 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3417 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3418 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3419 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3420
3421 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3422 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3423 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3424 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3425
3426 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3427 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3428 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3429 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3430 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3431
3432 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3433
3434 Using option "tcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on both
3435 the client and server sides of a connection. Note that this is meaningful
3436 only in "defaults" or "listen" sections. If this option is used in a
3437 frontend, only the client side will get keep-alives, and if this option is
3438 used in a backend, only the server side will get keep-alives. For this
3439 reason, it is strongly recommended to explicitly use "option clitcpka" and
3440 "option srvtcpka" when the configuration is split between frontends and
3441 backends.
3442
3443 See also : "option clitcpka", "option srvtcpka"
3444
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003445
3446option tcplog
3447 Enable advanced logging of TCP connections with session state and timers
3448 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3449 yes | yes | yes | yes
3450 Arguments : none
3451
3452 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
3453 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
3454 "option tcplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including, but
3455 not limited to, the connection timers, the session status, the connections
3456 numbers, the frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source
3457 address and ports. This option is useful for pure TCP proxies in order to
3458 find which of the client or server disconnects or times out. For normal HTTP
3459 proxies, it's better to use "option httplog" which is even more complete.
3460
3461 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
3462
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003463 See also : "option httplog", and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003464
3465
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003466option transparent
3467no option transparent
3468 Enable client-side transparent proxying
3469 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01003470 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003471 Arguments : none
3472
3473 This option was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer 3
3474 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
3475 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
3476 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
3477 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
3478 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
3479 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
3480 appropriate server.
3481
3482 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
3483 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
3484
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003485 See also: the "usersrc" argument of the "source" keyword, and the
3486 "transparent" option of the "bind" keyword.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003487
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003488
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003489persist rdp-cookie
3490persist rdp-cookie(name)
3491 Enable RDP cookie-based persistence
3492 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3493 yes | no | yes | yes
3494 Arguments :
3495 <name> is the optional name of the RDP cookie to check. If omitted, the
3496 default cookie name "mstshash" will be used. There currently is
3497 no valid reason to change this name.
3498
3499 This statement enables persistence based on an RDP cookie. The RDP cookie
3500 contains all information required to find the server in the list of known
3501 servers. So when this option is set in the backend, the request is analysed
3502 and if an RDP cookie is found, it is decoded. If it matches a known server
3503 which is still UP (or if "option persist" is set), then the connection is
3504 forwarded to this server.
3505
3506 Note that this only makes sense in a TCP backend, but for this to work, the
3507 frontend must have waited long enough to ensure that an RDP cookie is present
3508 in the request buffer. This is the same requirement as with the "rdp-cookie"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003509 load-balancing method. Thus it is highly recommended to put all statements in
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003510 a single "listen" section.
3511
3512 Example :
3513 listen tse-farm
3514 bind :3389
3515 # wait up to 5s for an RDP cookie in the request
3516 tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
3517 tcp-request content accept if RDP_COOKIE
3518 # apply RDP cookie persistence
3519 persist rdp-cookie
3520 # if server is unknown, let's balance on the same cookie.
3521 # alternatively, "balance leastconn" may be useful too.
3522 balance rdp-cookie
3523 server srv1 1.1.1.1:3389
3524 server srv2 1.1.1.2:3389
3525
3526 See also : "balance rdp-cookie", "tcp-request" and the "req_rdp_cookie" ACL.
3527
3528
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +01003529rate-limit sessions <rate>
3530 Set a limit on the number of new sessions accepted per second on a frontend
3531 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3532 yes | yes | yes | no
3533 Arguments :
3534 <rate> The <rate> parameter is an integer designating the maximum number
3535 of new sessions per second to accept on the frontend.
3536
3537 When the frontend reaches the specified number of new sessions per second, it
3538 stops accepting new connections until the rate drops below the limit again.
3539 During this time, the pending sessions will be kept in the socket's backlog
3540 (in system buffers) and haproxy will not even be aware that sessions are
3541 pending. When applying very low limit on a highly loaded service, it may make
3542 sense to increase the socket's backlog using the "backlog" keyword.
3543
3544 This feature is particularly efficient at blocking connection-based attacks
3545 or service abuse on fragile servers. Since the session rate is measured every
3546 millisecond, it is extremely accurate. Also, the limit applies immediately,
3547 no delay is needed at all to detect the threshold.
3548
3549 Example : limit the connection rate on SMTP to 10 per second max
3550 listen smtp
3551 mode tcp
3552 bind :25
3553 rate-limit sessions 10
3554 server 127.0.0.1:1025
3555
3556 Note : when the maximum rate is reached, the frontend's status appears as
3557 "FULL" in the statistics, exactly as when it is saturated.
3558
3559 See also : the "backlog" keyword and the "fe_sess_rate" ACL criterion.
3560
3561
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003562redirect location <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
3563redirect prefix <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003564 Return an HTTP redirection if/unless a condition is matched
3565 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3566 no | yes | yes | yes
3567
3568 If/unless the condition is matched, the HTTP request will lead to a redirect
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003569 response. If no condition is specified, the redirect applies unconditionally.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003570
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003571 Arguments :
3572 <to> With "redirect location", the exact value in <to> is placed into
3573 the HTTP "Location" header. In case of "redirect prefix", the
3574 "Location" header is built from the concatenation of <to> and the
3575 complete URI, including the query string, unless the "drop-query"
Willy Tarreaufe651a52008-11-19 21:15:17 +01003576 option is specified (see below). As a special case, if <to>
3577 equals exactly "/" in prefix mode, then nothing is inserted
3578 before the original URI. It allows one to redirect to the same
3579 URL.
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003580
3581 <code> The code is optional. It indicates which type of HTTP redirection
3582 is desired. Only codes 301, 302 and 303 are supported, and 302 is
3583 used if no code is specified. 301 means "Moved permanently", and
3584 a browser may cache the Location. 302 means "Moved permanently"
3585 and means that the browser should not cache the redirection. 303
3586 is equivalent to 302 except that the browser will fetch the
3587 location with a GET method.
3588
3589 <option> There are several options which can be specified to adjust the
3590 expected behaviour of a redirection :
3591
3592 - "drop-query"
3593 When this keyword is used in a prefix-based redirection, then the
3594 location will be set without any possible query-string, which is useful
3595 for directing users to a non-secure page for instance. It has no effect
3596 with a location-type redirect.
3597
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003598 - "append-slash"
3599 This keyword may be used in conjunction with "drop-query" to redirect
3600 users who use a URL not ending with a '/' to the same one with the '/'.
3601 It can be useful to ensure that search engines will only see one URL.
3602 For this, a return code 301 is preferred.
3603
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003604 - "set-cookie NAME[=value]"
3605 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "=value")
3606 to the response. This is sometimes used to indicate that a user has
3607 been seen, for instance to protect against some types of DoS. No other
3608 cookie option is added, so the cookie will be a session cookie. Note
3609 that for a browser, a sole cookie name without an equal sign is
3610 different from a cookie with an equal sign.
3611
3612 - "clear-cookie NAME[=]"
3613 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "="), but
3614 with the "Max-Age" attribute set to zero. This will tell the browser to
3615 delete this cookie. It is useful for instance on logout pages. It is
3616 important to note that clearing the cookie "NAME" will not remove a
3617 cookie set with "NAME=value". You have to clear the cookie "NAME=" for
3618 that, because the browser makes the difference.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003619
3620 Example: move the login URL only to HTTPS.
3621 acl clear dst_port 80
3622 acl secure dst_port 8080
3623 acl login_page url_beg /login
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003624 acl logout url_beg /logout
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003625 acl uid_given url_reg /login?userid=[^&]+
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003626 acl cookie_set hdr_sub(cookie) SEEN=1
3627
3628 redirect prefix https://mysite.com set-cookie SEEN=1 if !cookie_set
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003629 redirect prefix https://mysite.com if login_page !secure
3630 redirect prefix http://mysite.com drop-query if login_page !uid_given
3631 redirect location http://mysite.com/ if !login_page secure
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003632 redirect location / clear-cookie USERID= if logout
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003633
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003634 Example: send redirects for request for articles without a '/'.
3635 acl missing_slash path_reg ^/article/[^/]*$
3636 redirect code 301 prefix / drop-query append-slash if missing_slash
3637
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003638 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003639
3640
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003641redisp (deprecated)
3642redispatch (deprecated)
3643 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3644 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3645 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003646 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003647
3648 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3649 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3650 be able to access the service anymore.
3651
3652 Specifying "redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their persistence and
3653 redistribute them to a working server.
3654
3655 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3656 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3657 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003658
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003659 This form is deprecated, do not use it in any new configuration, use the new
3660 "option redispatch" instead.
3661
3662 See also : "option redispatch"
3663
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003664
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003665reqadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003666 Add a header at the end of the HTTP request
3667 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3668 no | yes | yes | yes
3669 Arguments :
3670 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3671 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003672 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003673
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003674 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3675 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3676
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003677 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3678 the last header of an HTTP request.
3679
3680 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3681 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3682 responses.
3683
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003684 Example : add "X-Proto: SSL" to requests coming via port 81
3685 acl is-ssl dst_port 81
3686 reqadd X-Proto:\ SSL if is-ssl
3687
3688 See also: "rspadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3689 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003690
3691
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003692reqallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3693reqiallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003694 Definitely allow an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3695 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3696 no | yes | yes | yes
3697 Arguments :
3698 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3699 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3700 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3701 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3702 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3703 "reqallow" keyword strictly matches case while "reqiallow"
3704 ignores case.
3705
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003706 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3707 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3708
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003709 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3710 <search> will mark the request as allowed, even if any later test would
3711 result in a deny. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3712 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003713 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003714
3715 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3716 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3717
3718 Example :
3719 # allow www.* but refuse *.local
3720 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3721 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3722
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003723 See also: "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and
3724 section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003725
3726
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003727reqdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3728reqidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003729 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP request
3730 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3731 no | yes | yes | yes
3732 Arguments :
3733 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3734 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3735 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3736 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3737 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqdel"
3738 keyword strictly matches case while "reqidel" ignores case.
3739
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003740 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3741 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3742
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003743 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request
3744 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3745 and/or dangerous headers or cookies from a request before passing it to the
3746 next servers.
3747
3748 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3749 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3750 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3751
3752 Example :
3753 # remove X-Forwarded-For header and SERVER cookie
3754 reqidel ^X-Forwarded-For:.*
3755 reqidel ^Cookie:.*SERVER=
3756
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003757 See also: "reqadd", "reqrep", "rspdel", section 6 about HTTP header
3758 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003759
3760
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003761reqdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3762reqideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003763 Deny an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3764 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3765 no | yes | yes | yes
3766 Arguments :
3767 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3768 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3769 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3770 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3771 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3772 "reqdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "reqideny" ignores
3773 case.
3774
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003775 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3776 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3777
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003778 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3779 <search> will mark the request as denied, even if any later test would
3780 result in an allow. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3781 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003782 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003783
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003784 A denied request will generate an "HTTP 403 forbidden" response once the
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003785 complete request has been parsed. This is consistent with what is practiced
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003786 using ACLs.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003787
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003788 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3789 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3790
3791 Example :
3792 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*
3793 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3794 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3795
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003796 See also: "reqallow", "rspdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3797 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003798
3799
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003800reqpass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3801reqipass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003802 Ignore any HTTP request line matching a regular expression in next rules
3803 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3804 no | yes | yes | yes
3805 Arguments :
3806 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3807 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3808 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3809 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3810 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3811 "reqpass" keyword strictly matches case while "reqipass" ignores
3812 case.
3813
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003814 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3815 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3816
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003817 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3818 <search> will skip next rules, without assigning any deny or allow verdict.
3819 The test applies both to the request line and to request headers. Keep in
3820 mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3821
3822 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3823 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3824
3825 Example :
3826 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*, but ignore "www.private.local"
3827 reqipass ^Host:\ www.private\.local
3828 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3829 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3830
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003831 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3832 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003833
3834
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003835reqrep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3836reqirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003837 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP request line
3838 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3839 no | yes | yes | yes
3840 Arguments :
3841 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3842 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3843 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3844 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3845 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqrep"
3846 keyword strictly matches case while "reqirep" ignores case.
3847
3848 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3849 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
3850 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
3851 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003852 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003853
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003854 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3855 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3856
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003857 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request (both
3858 the request line and header lines) will be completely replaced with <string>.
3859 Most common use of this is to rewrite URLs or domain names in "Host" headers.
3860
3861 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3862 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3863 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
3864 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that URLs in
3865 request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3866
3867 Example :
3868 # replace "/static/" with "/" at the beginning of any request path.
3869 reqrep ^([^\ ]*)\ /static/(.*) \1\ /\2
3870 # replace "www.mydomain.com" with "www" in the host name.
3871 reqirep ^Host:\ www.mydomain.com Host:\ www
3872
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003873 See also: "reqadd", "reqdel", "rsprep", section 6 about HTTP header
3874 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003875
3876
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003877reqtarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3878reqitarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003879 Tarpit an HTTP request containing a line matching a regular expression
3880 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3881 no | yes | yes | yes
3882 Arguments :
3883 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3884 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3885 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3886 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3887 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3888 "reqtarpit" keyword strictly matches case while "reqitarpit"
3889 ignores case.
3890
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003891 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3892 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3893
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003894 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3895 <search> will be tarpitted, which means that it will connect to nowhere, will
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003896 be kept open for a pre-defined time, then will return an HTTP error 500 so
3897 that the attacker does not suspect it has been tarpitted. The status 500 will
3898 be reported in the logs, but the completion flags will indicate "PT". The
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003899 delay is defined by "timeout tarpit", or "timeout connect" if the former is
3900 not set.
3901
3902 The goal of the tarpit is to slow down robots attacking servers with
3903 identifiable requests. Many robots limit their outgoing number of connections
3904 and stay connected waiting for a reply which can take several minutes to
3905 come. Depending on the environment and attack, it may be particularly
3906 efficient at reducing the load on the network and firewalls.
3907
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003908 Examples :
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003909 # ignore user-agents reporting any flavour of "Mozilla" or "MSIE", but
3910 # block all others.
3911 reqipass ^User-Agent:\.*(Mozilla|MSIE)
3912 reqitarpit ^User-Agent:
3913
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003914 # block bad guys
3915 acl badguys src 10.1.0.3 172.16.13.20/28
3916 reqitarpit . if badguys
3917
3918 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "reqpass", section 6 about HTTP header
3919 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003920
3921
Willy Tarreaue5c5ce92008-06-20 17:27:19 +02003922retries <value>
3923 Set the number of retries to perform on a server after a connection failure
3924 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3925 yes | no | yes | yes
3926 Arguments :
3927 <value> is the number of times a connection attempt should be retried on
3928 a server when a connection either is refused or times out. The
3929 default value is 3.
3930
3931 It is important to understand that this value applies to the number of
3932 connection attempts, not full requests. When a connection has effectively
3933 been established to a server, there will be no more retry.
3934
3935 In order to avoid immediate reconnections to a server which is restarting,
3936 a turn-around timer of 1 second is applied before a retry occurs.
3937
3938 When "option redispatch" is set, the last retry may be performed on another
3939 server even if a cookie references a different server.
3940
3941 See also : "option redispatch"
3942
3943
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003944rspadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003945 Add a header at the end of the HTTP response
3946 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3947 no | yes | yes | yes
3948 Arguments :
3949 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3950 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003951 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003952
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003953 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3954 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3955
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003956 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3957 the last header of an HTTP response.
3958
3959 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3960 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3961 responses.
3962
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003963 See also: "reqadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3964 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003965
3966
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003967rspdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3968rspidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003969 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP response
3970 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3971 no | yes | yes | yes
3972 Arguments :
3973 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3974 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
3975 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
3976 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
3977 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
3978 The "rspdel" keyword strictly matches case while "rspidel"
3979 ignores case.
3980
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003981 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3982 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3983
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003984 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response
3985 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3986 and/or sensible headers or cookies from a response before passing it to the
3987 client.
3988
3989 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3990 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3991 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3992
3993 Example :
3994 # remove the Server header from responses
3995 reqidel ^Server:.*
3996
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003997 See also: "rspadd", "rsprep", "reqdel", section 6 about HTTP header
3998 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003999
4000
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004001rspdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4002rspideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004003 Block an HTTP response if a line matches a regular expression
4004 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4005 no | yes | yes | yes
4006 Arguments :
4007 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4008 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4009 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4010 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4011 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4012 The "rspdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "rspideny"
4013 ignores case.
4014
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004015 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4016 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4017
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004018 A response containing any line which matches extended regular expression
4019 <search> will mark the request as denied. The test applies both to the
4020 response line and to response headers. Keep in mind that header names are not
4021 case-sensitive.
4022
4023 Main use of this keyword is to prevent sensitive information leak and to
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01004024 block the response before it reaches the client. If a response is denied, it
4025 will be replaced with an HTTP 502 error so that the client never retrieves
4026 any sensitive data.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004027
4028 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
4029 Rspdeny should be avoided in new designs.
4030
4031 Example :
4032 # Ensure that no content type matching ms-word will leak
4033 rspideny ^Content-type:\.*/ms-word
4034
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004035 See also: "reqdeny", "acl", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation
4036 and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004037
4038
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004039rsprep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4040rspirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004041 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP response line
4042 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4043 no | yes | yes | yes
4044 Arguments :
4045 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4046 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4047 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4048 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4049 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4050 The "rsprep" keyword strictly matches case while "rspirep"
4051 ignores case.
4052
4053 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
4054 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
4055 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
4056 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004057 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004058
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004059 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4060 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4061
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004062 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response (both
4063 the response line and header lines) will be completely replaced with
4064 <string>. Most common use of this is to rewrite Location headers.
4065
4066 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4067 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4068 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
4069 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that header names
4070 are not case-sensitive.
4071
4072 Example :
4073 # replace "Location: 127.0.0.1:8080" with "Location: www.mydomain.com"
4074 rspirep ^Location:\ 127.0.0.1:8080 Location:\ www.mydomain.com
4075
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004076 See also: "rspadd", "rspdel", "reqrep", section 6 about HTTP header
4077 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004078
4079
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004080server <name> <address>[:port] [param*]
4081 Declare a server in a backend
4082 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4083 no | no | yes | yes
4084 Arguments :
4085 <name> is the internal name assigned to this server. This name will
4086 appear in logs and alerts.
4087
4088 <address> is the IPv4 address of the server. Alternatively, a resolvable
4089 hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved during
4090 start-up.
4091
4092 <ports> is an optional port specification. If set, all connections will
4093 be sent to this port. If unset, the same port the client
4094 connected to will be used. The port may also be prefixed by a "+"
4095 or a "-". In this case, the server's port will be determined by
4096 adding this value to the client's port.
4097
4098 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "server" keywords
4099 accepts an important number of options and has a complete section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004100 dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more details.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004101
4102 Examples :
4103 server first 10.1.1.1:1080 cookie first check inter 1000
4104 server second 10.1.1.2:1080 cookie second check inter 1000
4105
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01004106 See also: "default-server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004107
4108
4109source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004110source <addr>[:<port>] [interface <name>]
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004111 Set the source address for outgoing connections
4112 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4113 yes | no | yes | yes
4114 Arguments :
4115 <addr> is the IPv4 address HAProxy will bind to before connecting to a
4116 server. This address is also used as a source for health checks.
4117 The default value of 0.0.0.0 means that the system will select
4118 the most appropriate address to reach its destination.
4119
4120 <port> is an optional port. It is normally not needed but may be useful
4121 in some very specific contexts. The default value of zero means
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02004122 the system will select a free port. Note that port ranges are not
4123 supported in the backend. If you want to force port ranges, you
4124 have to specify them on each "server" line.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004125
4126 <addr2> is the IP address to present to the server when connections are
4127 forwarded in full transparent proxy mode. This is currently only
4128 supported on some patched Linux kernels. When this address is
4129 specified, clients connecting to the server will be presented
4130 with this address, while health checks will still use the address
4131 <addr>.
4132
4133 <port2> is the optional port to present to the server when connections
4134 are forwarded in full transparent proxy mode (see <addr2> above).
4135 The default value of zero means the system will select a free
4136 port.
4137
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004138 <name> is an optional interface name to which to bind to for outgoing
4139 traffic. On systems supporting this features (currently, only
4140 Linux), this allows one to bind all traffic to the server to
4141 this interface even if it is not the one the system would select
4142 based on routing tables. This should be used with extreme care.
4143 Note that using this option requires root privileges.
4144
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004145 The "source" keyword is useful in complex environments where a specific
4146 address only is allowed to connect to the servers. It may be needed when a
4147 private address must be used through a public gateway for instance, and it is
4148 known that the system cannot determine the adequate source address by itself.
4149
4150 An extension which is available on certain patched Linux kernels may be used
4151 through the "usesrc" optional keyword. It makes it possible to connect to the
4152 servers with an IP address which does not belong to the system itself. This
4153 is called "full transparent proxy mode". For this to work, the destination
4154 servers have to route their traffic back to this address through the machine
4155 running HAProxy, and IP forwarding must generally be enabled on this machine.
4156
4157 In this "full transparent proxy" mode, it is possible to force a specific IP
4158 address to be presented to the servers. This is not much used in fact. A more
4159 common use is to tell HAProxy to present the client's IP address. For this,
4160 there are two methods :
4161
4162 - present the client's IP and port addresses. This is the most transparent
4163 mode, but it can cause problems when IP connection tracking is enabled on
4164 the machine, because a same connection may be seen twice with different
4165 states. However, this solution presents the huge advantage of not
4166 limiting the system to the 64k outgoing address+port couples, because all
4167 of the client ranges may be used.
4168
4169 - present only the client's IP address and select a spare port. This
4170 solution is still quite elegant but slightly less transparent (downstream
4171 firewalls logs will not match upstream's). It also presents the downside
4172 of limiting the number of concurrent connections to the usual 64k ports.
4173 However, since the upstream and downstream ports are different, local IP
4174 connection tracking on the machine will not be upset by the reuse of the
4175 same session.
4176
4177 Note that depending on the transparent proxy technology used, it may be
4178 required to force the source address. In fact, cttproxy version 2 requires an
4179 IP address in <addr> above, and does not support setting of "0.0.0.0" as the
4180 IP address because it creates NAT entries which much match the exact outgoing
4181 address. Tproxy version 4 and some other kernel patches which work in pure
4182 forwarding mode generally will not have this limitation.
4183
4184 This option sets the default source for all servers in the backend. It may
4185 also be specified in a "defaults" section. Finer source address specification
4186 is possible at the server level using the "source" server option. Refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004187 section 5 for more information.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004188
4189 Examples :
4190 backend private
4191 # Connect to the servers using our 192.168.1.200 source address
4192 source 192.168.1.200
4193
4194 backend transparent_ssl1
4195 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address
4196 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4197
4198 backend transparent_ssl2
4199 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address and port
4200 # not recommended if IP conntrack is present on the local machine.
4201 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc client
4202
4203 backend transparent_ssl3
4204 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address. It
4205 # is more conntrack-friendly.
4206 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4207
4208 backend transparent_smtp
4209 # Connect to the SMTP farm from the client's source address/port
4210 # with Tproxy version 4.
4211 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc clientip
4212
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004213 See also : the "source" server option in section 5, the Tproxy patches for
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004214 the Linux kernel on www.balabit.com, the "bind" keyword.
4215
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01004216
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004217srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4218 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
4219 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4220 yes | no | yes | yes
4221 Arguments :
4222 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4223 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4224 as explained at the top of this document.
4225
4226 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
4227 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
4228 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
4229 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
4230 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
4231 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
4232 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
4233
4234 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
4235 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
4236 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
4237 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
4238 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004239 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004240 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004241 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004242
4243 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4244 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4245 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4246 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4247 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
4248 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
4249
4250 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
4251 Please use "timeout server" instead.
4252
4253 See also : "timeout server", "timeout client" and "clitimeout".
4254
4255
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004256stats auth <user>:<passwd>
4257 Enable statistics with authentication and grant access to an account
4258 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4259 yes | no | yes | yes
4260 Arguments :
4261 <user> is a user name to grant access to
4262
4263 <passwd> is the cleartext password associated to this user
4264
4265 This statement enables statistics with default settings, and restricts access
4266 to declared users only. It may be repeated as many times as necessary to
4267 allow as many users as desired. When a user tries to access the statistics
4268 without a valid account, a "401 Forbidden" response will be returned so that
4269 the browser asks the user to provide a valid user and password. The real
4270 which will be returned to the browser is configurable using "stats realm".
4271
4272 Since the authentication method is HTTP Basic Authentication, the passwords
4273 circulate in cleartext on the network. Thus, it was decided that the
4274 configuration file would also use cleartext passwords to remind the users
4275 that those ones should not be sensible and not shared with any other account.
4276
4277 It is also possible to reduce the scope of the proxies which appear in the
4278 report using "stats scope".
4279
4280 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4281 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4282 unobvious parameters.
4283
4284 Example :
4285 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4286 backend public_www
4287 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4288 stats enable
4289 stats hide-version
4290 stats scope .
4291 stats uri /admin?stats
4292 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4293 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4294 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4295
4296 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4297 backend private_monitoring
4298 stats enable
4299 stats uri /admin?stats
4300 stats refresh 5s
4301
4302 See also : "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats scope", "stats uri"
4303
4304
4305stats enable
4306 Enable statistics reporting with default settings
4307 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4308 yes | no | yes | yes
4309 Arguments : none
4310
4311 This statement enables statistics reporting with default settings defined
4312 at build time. Unless stated otherwise, these settings are used :
4313 - stats uri : /haproxy?stats
4314 - stats realm : "HAProxy Statistics"
4315 - stats auth : no authentication
4316 - stats scope : no restriction
4317
4318 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4319 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4320 unobvious parameters.
4321
4322 Example :
4323 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4324 backend public_www
4325 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4326 stats enable
4327 stats hide-version
4328 stats scope .
4329 stats uri /admin?stats
4330 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4331 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4332 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4333
4334 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4335 backend private_monitoring
4336 stats enable
4337 stats uri /admin?stats
4338 stats refresh 5s
4339
4340 See also : "stats auth", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4341
4342
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004343stats hide-version
4344 Enable statistics and hide HAProxy version reporting
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004345 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4346 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004347 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004348
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004349 By default, the stats page reports some useful status information along with
4350 the statistics. Among them is HAProxy's version. However, it is generally
4351 considered dangerous to report precise version to anyone, as it can help them
4352 target known weaknesses with specific attacks. The "stats hide-version"
4353 statement removes the version from the statistics report. This is recommended
4354 for public sites or any site with a weak login/password.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004355
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004356 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4357 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4358 unobvious parameters.
4359
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004360 Example :
4361 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4362 backend public_www
4363 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004364 stats enable
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004365 stats hide-version
4366 stats scope .
4367 stats uri /admin?stats
4368 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4369 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4370 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004371
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004372 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4373 backend private_monitoring
4374 stats enable
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004375 stats uri /admin?stats
4376 stats refresh 5s
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki15514c22010-01-04 16:03:09 +01004377
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004378 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004379
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004380
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004381stats realm <realm>
4382 Enable statistics and set authentication realm
4383 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4384 yes | no | yes | yes
4385 Arguments :
4386 <realm> is the name of the HTTP Basic Authentication realm reported to
4387 the browser. The browser uses it to display it in the pop-up
4388 inviting the user to enter a valid username and password.
4389
4390 The realm is read as a single word, so any spaces in it should be escaped
4391 using a backslash ('\').
4392
4393 This statement is useful only in conjunction with "stats auth" since it is
4394 only related to authentication.
4395
4396 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4397 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4398 unobvious parameters.
4399
4400 Example :
4401 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4402 backend public_www
4403 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4404 stats enable
4405 stats hide-version
4406 stats scope .
4407 stats uri /admin?stats
4408 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4409 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4410 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4411
4412 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4413 backend private_monitoring
4414 stats enable
4415 stats uri /admin?stats
4416 stats refresh 5s
4417
4418 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats uri"
4419
4420
4421stats refresh <delay>
4422 Enable statistics with automatic refresh
4423 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4424 yes | no | yes | yes
4425 Arguments :
4426 <delay> is the suggested refresh delay, specified in seconds, which will
4427 be returned to the browser consulting the report page. While the
4428 browser is free to apply any delay, it will generally respect it
4429 and refresh the page this every seconds. The refresh interval may
4430 be specified in any other non-default time unit, by suffixing the
4431 unit after the value, as explained at the top of this document.
4432
4433 This statement is useful on monitoring displays with a permanent page
4434 reporting the load balancer's activity. When set, the HTML report page will
4435 include a link "refresh"/"stop refresh" so that the user can select whether
4436 he wants automatic refresh of the page or not.
4437
4438 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4439 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4440 unobvious parameters.
4441
4442 Example :
4443 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4444 backend public_www
4445 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4446 stats enable
4447 stats hide-version
4448 stats scope .
4449 stats uri /admin?stats
4450 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4451 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4452 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4453
4454 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4455 backend private_monitoring
4456 stats enable
4457 stats uri /admin?stats
4458 stats refresh 5s
4459
4460 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4461
4462
4463stats scope { <name> | "." }
4464 Enable statistics and limit access scope
4465 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4466 yes | no | yes | yes
4467 Arguments :
4468 <name> is the name of a listen, frontend or backend section to be
4469 reported. The special name "." (a single dot) designates the
4470 section in which the statement appears.
4471
4472 When this statement is specified, only the sections enumerated with this
4473 statement will appear in the report. All other ones will be hidden. This
4474 statement may appear as many times as needed if multiple sections need to be
4475 reported. Please note that the name checking is performed as simple string
4476 comparisons, and that it is never checked that a give section name really
4477 exists.
4478
4479 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4480 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4481 unobvious parameters.
4482
4483 Example :
4484 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4485 backend public_www
4486 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4487 stats enable
4488 stats hide-version
4489 stats scope .
4490 stats uri /admin?stats
4491 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4492 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4493 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4494
4495 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4496 backend private_monitoring
4497 stats enable
4498 stats uri /admin?stats
4499 stats refresh 5s
4500
4501 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4502
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004503
4504stats show-desc [ <description> ]
4505 Enable reporting of a description on the statistics page.
4506 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4507 yes | no | yes | yes
4508
4509 <name> is an optional description to be reported. If unspecified, the
4510 description from global section is automatically used instead.
4511
4512 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4513 customers, where node or description should be different for each customer.
4514
4515 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4516 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4517 unobvious parameters.
4518
4519 Example :
4520 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4521 backend private_monitoring
4522 stats enable
4523 stats show-desc Master node for Europe, Asia, Africa
4524 stats uri /admin?stats
4525 stats refresh 5s
4526
4527 See also: "show-node", "stats enable", "stats uri" and "description" in
4528 global section.
4529
4530
4531stats show-legends
4532 Enable reporting additional informations on the statistics page :
4533 - cap: capabilities (proxy)
4534 - mode: one of tcp, http or health (proxy)
4535 - id: SNMP ID (proxy, socket, server)
4536 - IP (socket, server)
4537 - cookie (backend, server)
4538
4539 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4540 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4541 unobvious parameters.
4542
4543 See also: "stats enable", "stats uri".
4544
4545
4546stats show-node [ <name> ]
4547 Enable reporting of a host name on the statistics page.
4548 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4549 yes | no | yes | yes
4550 Arguments:
4551 <name> is an optional name to be reported. If unspecified, the
4552 node name from global section is automatically used instead.
4553
4554 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4555 customers, where node or description might be different on a stats page
4556 provided for each customer.
4557
4558 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4559 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4560 unobvious parameters.
4561
4562 Example:
4563 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4564 backend private_monitoring
4565 stats enable
4566 stats show-node Europe-1
4567 stats uri /admin?stats
4568 stats refresh 5s
4569
4570 See also: "show-desc", "stats enable", "stats uri", and "node" in global
4571 section.
4572
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004573
4574stats uri <prefix>
4575 Enable statistics and define the URI prefix to access them
4576 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4577 yes | no | yes | yes
4578 Arguments :
4579 <prefix> is the prefix of any URI which will be redirected to stats. This
4580 prefix may contain a question mark ('?') to indicate part of a
4581 query string.
4582
4583 The statistics URI is intercepted on the relayed traffic, so it appears as a
4584 page within the normal application. It is strongly advised to ensure that the
4585 selected URI will never appear in the application, otherwise it will never be
4586 possible to reach it in the application.
4587
4588 The default URI compiled in haproxy is "/haproxy?stats", but this may be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004589 changed at build time, so it's better to always explicitly specify it here.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004590 It is generally a good idea to include a question mark in the URI so that
4591 intermediate proxies refrain from caching the results. Also, since any string
4592 beginning with the prefix will be accepted as a stats request, the question
4593 mark helps ensuring that no valid URI will begin with the same words.
4594
4595 It is sometimes very convenient to use "/" as the URI prefix, and put that
4596 statement in a "listen" instance of its own. That makes it easy to dedicate
4597 an address or a port to statistics only.
4598
4599 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4600 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4601 unobvious parameters.
4602
4603 Example :
4604 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4605 backend public_www
4606 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4607 stats enable
4608 stats hide-version
4609 stats scope .
4610 stats uri /admin?stats
4611 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4612 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4613 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4614
4615 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4616 backend private_monitoring
4617 stats enable
4618 stats uri /admin?stats
4619 stats refresh 5s
4620
4621 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm"
4622
4623
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004624stick match <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <cond>]
4625 Define a request pattern matching condition to stick a user to a server
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004626 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004627 no | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004628
4629 Arguments :
4630 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4631 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4632 will be analysed in the hope to find a matching entry in a
4633 stickiness table. This rule is mandatory.
4634
4635 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4636 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4637 the "stick-table" statement.
4638
4639 <cond> is an optional matching condition. It makes it possible to match
4640 on a certain criterion only when other conditions are met (or
4641 not met). For instance, it could be used to match on a source IP
4642 address except when a request passes through a known proxy, in
4643 which case we'd match on a header containing that IP address.
4644
4645 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4646 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick match" statement
4647 describes a rule to extract the stickiness criterion from an incoming request
4648 or connection. See section 7 for a complete list of possible patterns and
4649 transformation rules.
4650
4651 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4652 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4653 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4654 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4655 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4656 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4657 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4658
4659 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick match" statement
4660 will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. See section 7 for
4661 ACL based conditions.
4662
4663 There is no limit on the number of "stick match" statements. The first that
4664 applies and matches will cause the request to be directed to the same server
4665 as was used for the request which created the entry. That way, multiple
4666 matches can be used as fallbacks.
4667
4668 The stick rules are checked after the persistence cookies, so they will not
4669 affect stickiness if a cookie has already been used to select a server. That
4670 way, it becomes very easy to insert cookies and match on IP addresses in
4671 order to maintain stickiness between HTTP and HTTPS.
4672
4673 Example :
4674 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4675 # last 30 minutes
4676 backend pop
4677 mode tcp
4678 balance roundrobin
4679 stick store-request src
4680 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4681 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4682 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4683
4684 backend smtp
4685 mode tcp
4686 balance roundrobin
4687 stick match src table pop
4688 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4689 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4690
4691 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4692 extraction.
4693
4694
4695stick on <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4696 Define a request pattern to associate a user to a server
4697 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4698 no | no | yes | yes
4699
4700 Note : This form is exactly equivalent to "stick match" followed by
4701 "stick store-request", all with the same arguments. Please refer
4702 to both keywords for details. It is only provided as a convenience
4703 for writing more maintainable configurations.
4704
4705 Examples :
4706 # The following form ...
4707 stick or src table pop if !localhost
4708
4709 # ...is strictly equivalent to this one :
4710 stick match src table pop if !localhost
4711 stick store-request src table pop if !localhost
4712
4713
4714 # Use cookie persistence for HTTP, and stick on source address for HTTPS as
4715 # well as HTTP without cookie. Share the same table between both accesses.
4716 backend http
4717 mode http
4718 balance roundrobin
4719 stick on src table https
4720 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
4721 server s1 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s1
4722 server s2 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s2
4723
4724 backend https
4725 mode tcp
4726 balance roundrobin
4727 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4728 stick on src
4729 server s1 192.168.1.1:443
4730 server s2 192.168.1.1:443
4731
4732 See also : "stick match" and "stick store-request"
4733
4734
4735stick store-request <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4736 Define a request pattern used to create an entry in a stickiness table
4737 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4738 no | no | yes | yes
4739
4740 Arguments :
4741 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4742 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4743 will be analysed, extracted and stored in the table once a
4744 server is selected.
4745
4746 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4747 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4748 the "stick-table" statement.
4749
4750 <cond> is an optional storage condition. It makes it possible to store
4751 certain criteria only when some conditions are met (or not met).
4752 For instance, it could be used to store the source IP address
4753 except when the request passes through a known proxy, in which
4754 case we'd store a converted form of a header containing that IP
4755 address.
4756
4757 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4758 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick store-request" statement
4759 describes a rule to decide what to extract from the request and when to do
4760 it, in order to store it into a stickiness table for further requests to
4761 match it using the "stick match" statement. Obviously the extracted part must
4762 make sense and have a chance to be matched in a further request. Storing a
4763 client's IP address for instance often makes sense. Storing an ID found in a
4764 URL parameter also makes sense. Storing a source port will almost never make
4765 any sense because it will be randomly matched. See section 7 for a complete
4766 list of possible patterns and transformation rules.
4767
4768 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4769 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4770 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4771 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4772 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4773 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4774 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4775
4776 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick store-request"
4777 statement will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. This
4778 condition will be evaluated while parsing the request, so any criteria can be
4779 used. See section 7 for ACL based conditions.
4780
4781 There is no limit on the number of "stick store-request" statements, but
4782 there is a limit of 8 simultaneous stores per request or response. This
4783 makes it possible to store up to 8 criteria, all extracted from either the
4784 request or the response, regardless of the number of rules. Only the 8 first
4785 ones which match will be kept. Using this, it is possible to feed multiple
4786 tables at once in the hope to increase the chance to recognize a user on
4787 another protocol or access method.
4788
4789 The "store-request" rules are evaluated once the server connection has been
4790 established, so that the table will contain the real server that processed
4791 the request.
4792
4793 Example :
4794 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4795 # last 30 minutes
4796 backend pop
4797 mode tcp
4798 balance roundrobin
4799 stick store-request src
4800 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4801 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4802 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4803
4804 backend smtp
4805 mode tcp
4806 balance roundrobin
4807 stick match src table pop
4808 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4809 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4810
4811 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4812 extraction.
4813
4814
4815stick-table type {ip | integer | string [len <length>] } size <size>
4816 [expire <expire>] [nopurge]
4817 Configure the stickiness table for the current backend
4818 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4819 no | no | yes | yes
4820
4821 Arguments :
4822 ip a table declared with "type ip" will only store IPv4 addresses.
4823 This form is very compact (about 50 bytes per entry) and allows
4824 very fast entry lookup and stores with almost no overhead. This
4825 is mainly used to store client source IP addresses.
4826
4827 integer a table declared with "type integer" will store 32bit integers
4828 which can represent a client identifier found in a request for
4829 instance.
4830
4831 string a table declared with "type string" will store substrings of up
4832 to <len> characters. If the string provided by the pattern
4833 extractor is larger than <len>, it will be truncated before
4834 being stored. During matching, at most <len> characters will be
4835 compared between the string in the table and the extracted
4836 pattern. When not specified, the string is automatically limited
4837 to 31 characters.
4838
4839 <length> is the maximum number of characters that will be stored in a
4840 "string" type table. See type "string" above. Be careful when
4841 changing this parameter as memory usage will proportionally
4842 increase.
4843
4844 <size> is the maximum number of entries that can fit in the table. This
4845 value directly impats memory usage. Count approximately 50 bytes
4846 per entry, plus the size of a string if any. The size supports
4847 suffixes "k", "m", "g" for 2^10, 2^20 and 2^30 factors.
4848
4849 [nopurge] indicates that we refuse to purge older entries when the table
4850 is full. When not specified and the table is full when haproxy
4851 wants to store an entry in it, it will flush a few of the oldest
4852 entries in order to release some space for the new ones. This is
4853 most often the desired behaviour. In some specific cases, it
4854 be desirable to refuse new entries instead of purging the older
4855 ones. That may be the case when the amount of data to store is
4856 far above the hardware limits and we prefer not to offer access
4857 to new clients than to reject the ones already connected. When
4858 using this parameter, be sure to properly set the "expire"
4859 parameter (see below).
4860
4861 <expire> defines the maximum duration of an entry in the table since it
4862 was last created, refreshed or matched. The expiration delay is
4863 defined using the standard time format, similarly as the various
4864 timeouts. The maximum duration is slightly above 24 days. See
4865 section 2.2 for more information. If this delay is not specified,
4866 the session won't automatically expire, but older entries will
4867 be removed once full. Be sure not to use the "nopurge" parameter
4868 if not expiration delay is specified.
4869
4870 The is only one stick-table per backend. At the moment of writing this doc,
4871 it does not seem useful to have multiple tables per backend. If this happens
4872 to be required, simply create a dummy backend with a stick-table in it and
4873 reference it.
4874
4875 It is important to understand that stickiness based on learning information
4876 has some limitations, including the fact that all learned associations are
4877 lost upon restart. In general it can be good as a complement but not always
4878 as an exclusive stickiness.
4879
4880 See also : "stick match", "stick on", "stick store-request", and section 2.2
4881 about time format.
4882
4883
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004884tcp-request content accept [{if | unless} <condition>]
4885 Accept a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
4886 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4887 no | yes | yes | no
4888
4889 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately validated if the
4890 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
4891 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
4892 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
4893 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
4894 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
4895 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
4896 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
4897
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004898 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004899 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
4900
4901 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action already is
4902 "accept". Thus, this statement alone does not bring anything without another
4903 "reject" statement.
4904
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004905 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004906
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004907 See also : "tcp-request content reject", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004908
4909
4910tcp-request content reject [{if | unless} <condition>]
4911 Reject a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
4912 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4913 no | yes | yes | no
4914
4915 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately rejected if the
4916 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
4917 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
4918 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
4919 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
4920 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
4921 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
4922 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
4923
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004924 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004925 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
4926
4927 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action is set to
4928 "accept".
4929
4930 Example:
4931 # reject SMTP connection if client speaks first
4932 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
4933 acl content_present req_len gt 0
4934 tcp-request reject if content_present
4935
4936 # Forward HTTPS connection only if client speaks
4937 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
4938 acl content_present req_len gt 0
4939 tcp-request accept if content_present
4940 tcp-request reject
4941
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004942 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004943
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004944 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004945
4946
4947tcp-request inspect-delay <timeout>
4948 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for data during content inspection
4949 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4950 no | yes | yes | no
4951 Arguments :
4952 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4953 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4954 as explained at the top of this document.
4955
4956 People using haproxy primarily as a TCP relay are often worried about the
4957 risk of passing any type of protocol to a server without any analysis. In
4958 order to be able to analyze the request contents, we must first withhold
4959 the data then analyze them. This statement simply enables withholding of
4960 data for at most the specified amount of time.
4961
4962 Note that when performing content inspection, haproxy will evaluate the whole
4963 rules for every new chunk which gets in, taking into account the fact that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004964 those data are partial. If no rule matches before the aforementioned delay,
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004965 a last check is performed upon expiration, this time considering that the
Willy Tarreaud869b242009-03-15 14:43:58 +01004966 contents are definitive. If no delay is set, haproxy will not wait at all
4967 and will immediately apply a verdict based on the available information.
4968 Obviously this is unlikely to be very useful and might even be racy, so such
4969 setups are not recommended.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004970
4971 As soon as a rule matches, the request is released and continues as usual. If
4972 the timeout is reached and no rule matches, the default policy will be to let
4973 it pass through unaffected.
4974
4975 For most protocols, it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients
4976 send the full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to
4977 cover TCP retransmits but that's all. For some protocols, it may make sense
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004978 to use large values, for instance to ensure that the client never talks
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004979 before the server (eg: SMTP), or to wait for a client to talk before passing
4980 data to the server (eg: SSL). Note that the client timeout must cover at
4981 least the inspection delay, otherwise it will expire first.
4982
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004983 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request content reject",
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004984 "timeout client".
4985
4986
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01004987timeout check <timeout>
4988 Set additional check timeout, but only after a connection has been already
4989 established.
4990
4991 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4992 yes | no | yes | yes
4993 Arguments:
4994 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4995 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4996 as explained at the top of this document.
4997
4998 If set, haproxy uses min("timeout connect", "inter") as a connect timeout
4999 for check and "timeout check" as an additional read timeout. The "min" is
5000 used so that people running with *very* long "timeout connect" (eg. those
5001 who needed this due to the queue or tarpit) do not slow down their checks.
Willy Tarreaud7550a22010-02-10 05:10:19 +01005002 (Please also note that there is no valid reason to have such long connect
5003 timeouts, because "timeout queue" and "timeout tarpit" can always be used to
5004 avoid that).
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005005
5006 If "timeout check" is not set haproxy uses "inter" for complete check
5007 timeout (connect + read) exactly like all <1.3.15 version.
5008
5009 In most cases check request is much simpler and faster to handle than normal
5010 requests and people may want to kick out laggy servers so this timeout should
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005011 be smaller than "timeout server".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005012
5013 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5014 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5015 forget about it.
5016
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005017 See also: "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout server",
5018 "timeout tarpit".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005019
5020
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005021timeout client <timeout>
5022timeout clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5023 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
5024 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5025 yes | yes | yes | no
5026 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005027 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005028 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5029 as explained at the top of this document.
5030
5031 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
5032 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5033 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
5034 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
5035 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
5036 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
5037 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
5038 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005039 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005040 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
5041 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
5042
5043 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
5044 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5045 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5046 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5047 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5048 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5049
5050 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "clitimeout". It is recommended
5051 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout clitimeout" is
5052 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5053
5054 See also : "clitimeout", "timeout server".
5055
5056
5057timeout connect <timeout>
5058timeout contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5059 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
5060 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5061 yes | no | yes | yes
5062 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005063 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005064 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5065 as explained at the top of this document.
5066
5067 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005068 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005069 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005070 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005071 connect timeout also presets both queue and tarpit timeouts to the same value
5072 if these have not been specified.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005073
5074 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5075 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5076 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5077 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5078 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
5079 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5080
5081 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "contimeout". It is recommended
5082 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout contimeout" is
5083 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5084
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005085 See also: "timeout check", "timeout queue", "timeout server", "contimeout",
5086 "timeout tarpit".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005087
5088
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005089timeout http-keep-alive <timeout>
5090 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a new HTTP request to appear
5091 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5092 yes | yes | yes | yes
5093 Arguments :
5094 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5095 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5096 as explained at the top of this document.
5097
5098 By default, the time to wait for a new request in case of keep-alive is set
5099 by "timeout http-request". However this is not always convenient because some
5100 people want very short keep-alive timeouts in order to release connections
5101 faster, and others prefer to have larger ones but still have short timeouts
5102 once the request has started to present itself.
5103
5104 The "http-keep-alive" timeout covers these needs. It will define how long to
5105 wait for a new HTTP request to start coming after a response was sent. Once
5106 the first byte of request has been seen, the "http-request" timeout is used
5107 to wait for the complete request to come. Note that empty lines prior to a
5108 new request do not refresh the timeout and are not counted as a new request.
5109
5110 There is also another difference between the two timeouts : when a connection
5111 expires during timeout http-keep-alive, no error is returned, the connection
5112 just closes. If the connection expires in "http-request" while waiting for a
5113 connection to complete, a HTTP 408 error is returned.
5114
5115 In general it is optimal to set this value to a few tens to hundreds of
5116 milliseconds, to allow users to fetch all objects of a page at once but
5117 without waiting for further clicks. Also, if set to a very small value (eg:
5118 1 millisecond) it will probably only accept pipelined requests but not the
5119 non-pipelined ones. It may be a nice trade-off for very large sites running
5120 with tends to hundreds of thousands of clients.
5121
5122 If this parameter is not set, the "http-request" timeout applies, and if both
5123 are not set, "timeout client" still applies at the lower level. It should be
5124 set in the frontend to take effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in
5125 which case the HTTP backend's timeout will be used.
5126
5127 See also : "timeout http-request", "timeout client".
5128
5129
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005130timeout http-request <timeout>
5131 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a complete HTTP request
5132 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005133 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005134 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005135 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005136 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5137 as explained at the top of this document.
5138
5139 In order to offer DoS protection, it may be required to lower the maximum
5140 accepted time to receive a complete HTTP request without affecting the client
5141 timeout. This helps protecting against established connections on which
5142 nothing is sent. The client timeout cannot offer a good protection against
5143 this abuse because it is an inactivity timeout, which means that if the
5144 attacker sends one character every now and then, the timeout will not
5145 trigger. With the HTTP request timeout, no matter what speed the client
5146 types, the request will be aborted if it does not complete in time.
5147
5148 Note that this timeout only applies to the header part of the request, and
5149 not to any data. As soon as the empty line is received, this timeout is not
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005150 used anymore. It is used again on keep-alive connections to wait for a second
5151 request if "timeout http-keep-alive" is not set.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005152
5153 Generally it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients send the
5154 full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to cover TCP
5155 retransmits but that's all. Setting it to very low values (eg: 50 ms) will
5156 generally work on local networks as long as there are no packet losses. This
5157 will prevent people from sending bare HTTP requests using telnet.
5158
5159 If this parameter is not set, the client timeout still applies between each
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005160 chunk of the incoming request. It should be set in the frontend to take
5161 effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in which case the HTTP backend's
5162 timeout will be used.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005163
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005164 See also : "timeout http-keep-alive", "timeout client".
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005165
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005166
5167timeout queue <timeout>
5168 Set the maximum time to wait in the queue for a connection slot to be free
5169 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5170 yes | no | yes | yes
5171 Arguments :
5172 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5173 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5174 as explained at the top of this document.
5175
5176 When a server's maxconn is reached, connections are left pending in a queue
5177 which may be server-specific or global to the backend. In order not to wait
5178 indefinitely, a timeout is applied to requests pending in the queue. If the
5179 timeout is reached, it is considered that the request will almost never be
5180 served, so it is dropped and a 503 error is returned to the client.
5181
5182 The "timeout queue" statement allows to fix the maximum time for a request to
5183 be left pending in a queue. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's
5184 connection timeout ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility
5185 with older versions with no "timeout queue" parameter.
5186
5187 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5188
5189
5190timeout server <timeout>
5191timeout srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5192 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
5193 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5194 yes | no | yes | yes
5195 Arguments :
5196 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5197 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5198 as explained at the top of this document.
5199
5200 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
5201 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5202 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
5203 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
5204 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
5205 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
5206 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
5207
5208 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5209 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5210 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
5211 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
5212 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005213 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005214 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005215 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005216
5217 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5218 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5219 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5220 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5221 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5222 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5223
5224 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "srvtimeout". It is recommended
5225 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout srvtimeout" is
5226 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5227
5228 See also : "srvtimeout", "timeout client".
5229
5230
5231timeout tarpit <timeout>
5232 Set the duration for which tapitted connections will be maintained
5233 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5234 yes | yes | yes | yes
5235 Arguments :
5236 <timeout> is the tarpit duration specified in milliseconds by default, but
5237 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5238 as explained at the top of this document.
5239
5240 When a connection is tarpitted using "reqtarpit", it is maintained open with
5241 no activity for a certain amount of time, then closed. "timeout tarpit"
5242 defines how long it will be maintained open.
5243
5244 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5245 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5246 document. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's connection timeout
5247 ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility with older versions
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005248 with no "timeout tapit" parameter.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005249
5250 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5251
5252
5253transparent (deprecated)
5254 Enable client-side transparent proxying
5255 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01005256 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005257 Arguments : none
5258
5259 This keyword was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer
5260 3 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
5261 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
5262 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
5263 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
5264 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
5265 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
5266 appropriate server.
5267
5268 The "transparent" keyword is deprecated, use "option transparent" instead.
5269
5270 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
5271 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
5272
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005273 See also: "option transparent"
5274
5275
5276use_backend <backend> if <condition>
5277use_backend <backend> unless <condition>
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005278 Switch to a specific backend if/unless an ACL-based condition is matched.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005279 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5280 no | yes | yes | no
5281 Arguments :
5282 <backend> is the name of a valid backend or "listen" section.
5283
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005284 <condition> is a condition composed of ACLs, as described in section 7.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005285
5286 When doing content-switching, connections arrive on a frontend and are then
5287 dispatched to various backends depending on a number of conditions. The
5288 relation between the conditions and the backends is described with the
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005289 "use_backend" keyword. While it is normally used with HTTP processing, it can
5290 also be used in pure TCP, either without content using stateless ACLs (eg:
5291 source address validation) or combined with a "tcp-request" rule to wait for
5292 some payload.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005293
5294 There may be as many "use_backend" rules as desired. All of these rules are
5295 evaluated in their declaration order, and the first one which matches will
5296 assign the backend.
5297
5298 In the first form, the backend will be used if the condition is met. In the
5299 second form, the backend will be used if the condition is not met. If no
5300 condition is valid, the backend defined with "default_backend" will be used.
5301 If no default backend is defined, either the servers in the same section are
5302 used (in case of a "listen" section) or, in case of a frontend, no server is
5303 used and a 503 service unavailable response is returned.
5304
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005305 Note that it is possible to switch from a TCP frontend to an HTTP backend. In
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005306 this case, either the frontend has already checked that the protocol is HTTP,
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005307 and backend processing will immediately follow, or the backend will wait for
5308 a complete HTTP request to get in. This feature is useful when a frontend
5309 must decode several protocols on a unique port, one of them being HTTP.
5310
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005311 See also: "default_backend", "tcp-request", and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005312
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005313
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +010053145. Server and default-server options
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01005315------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005316
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005317The "server" and "default-server" keywords support a certain number of settings
5318which are all passed as arguments on the server line. The order in which those
5319arguments appear does not count, and they are all optional. Some of those
5320settings are single words (booleans) while others expect one or several values
5321after them. In this case, the values must immediately follow the setting name.
5322Except default-server, all those settings must be specified after the server's
5323address if they are used:
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005324
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005325 server <name> <address>[:port] [settings ...]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005326 default-server [settings ...]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005327
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005328The currently supported settings are the following ones.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005329
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005330addr <ipv4>
5331 Using the "addr" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different IP address
5332 to send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate an IP
5333 address to specific component able to perform complex tests which are more
5334 suitable to health-checks than the application. This parameter is ignored if
5335 the "check" parameter is not set. See also the "port" parameter.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005336
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005337 Supported in default-server: No
5338
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005339backup
5340 When "backup" is present on a server line, the server is only used in load
5341 balancing when all other non-backup servers are unavailable. Requests coming
5342 with a persistence cookie referencing the server will always be served
5343 though. By default, only the first operational backup server is used, unless
5344 the "allbackups" option is set in the backend. See also the "allbackups"
5345 option.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005346
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005347 Supported in default-server: No
5348
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005349check
5350 This option enables health checks on the server. By default, a server is
5351 always considered available. If "check" is set, the server will receive
5352 periodic health checks to ensure that it is really able to serve requests.
5353 The default address and port to send the tests to are those of the server,
5354 and the default source is the same as the one defined in the backend. It is
5355 possible to change the address using the "addr" parameter, the port using the
5356 "port" parameter, the source address using the "source" address, and the
5357 interval and timers using the "inter", "rise" and "fall" parameters. The
5358 request method is define in the backend using the "httpchk", "smtpchk",
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01005359 "mysql-check" and "ssl-hello-chk" options. Please refer to those options and
5360 parameters for more information.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005361
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005362 Supported in default-server: No
5363
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005364cookie <value>
5365 The "cookie" parameter sets the cookie value assigned to the server to
5366 <value>. This value will be checked in incoming requests, and the first
5367 operational server possessing the same value will be selected. In return, in
5368 cookie insertion or rewrite modes, this value will be assigned to the cookie
5369 sent to the client. There is nothing wrong in having several servers sharing
5370 the same cookie value, and it is in fact somewhat common between normal and
5371 backup servers. See also the "cookie" keyword in backend section.
5372
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005373 Supported in default-server: No
5374
5375error-limit <count>
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01005376 If health observing is enabled, the "error-limit" parameter specifies the
5377 number of consecutive errors that triggers event selected by the "on-error"
5378 option. By default it is set to 10 consecutive errors.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005379
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005380 Supported in default-server: Yes
5381
5382 See also the "check", "error-limit" and "on-error".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005383
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005384fall <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005385 The "fall" parameter states that a server will be considered as dead after
5386 <count> consecutive unsuccessful health checks. This value defaults to 3 if
5387 unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "rise" parameters.
5388
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005389 Supported in default-server: Yes
5390
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005391id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02005392 Set a persistent ID for the server. This ID must be positive and unique for
5393 the proxy. An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first
5394 assigned value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005395
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005396 Supported in default-server: No
5397
5398inter <delay>
5399fastinter <delay>
5400downinter <delay>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005401 The "inter" parameter sets the interval between two consecutive health checks
5402 to <delay> milliseconds. If left unspecified, the delay defaults to 2000 ms.
5403 It is also possible to use "fastinter" and "downinter" to optimize delays
5404 between checks depending on the server state :
5405
5406 Server state | Interval used
5407 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5408 UP 100% (non-transitional) | "inter"
5409 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5410 Transitionally UP (going down), |
5411 Transitionally DOWN (going up), | "fastinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5412 or yet unchecked. |
5413 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5414 DOWN 100% (non-transitional) | "downinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5415 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005416
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005417 Just as with every other time-based parameter, they can be entered in any
5418 other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The "inter" parameter also
5419 serves as a timeout for health checks sent to servers if "timeout check" is
5420 not set. In order to reduce "resonance" effects when multiple servers are
5421 hosted on the same hardware, the health-checks of all servers are started
5422 with a small time offset between them. It is also possible to add some random
5423 noise in the health checks interval using the global "spread-checks"
5424 keyword. This makes sense for instance when a lot of backends use the same
5425 servers.
5426
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005427 Supported in default-server: Yes
5428
5429maxconn <maxconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005430 The "maxconn" parameter specifies the maximal number of concurrent
5431 connections that will be sent to this server. If the number of incoming
5432 concurrent requests goes higher than this value, they will be queued, waiting
5433 for a connection to be released. This parameter is very important as it can
5434 save fragile servers from going down under extreme loads. If a "minconn"
5435 parameter is specified, the limit becomes dynamic. The default value is "0"
5436 which means unlimited. See also the "minconn" and "maxqueue" parameters, and
5437 the backend's "fullconn" keyword.
5438
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005439 Supported in default-server: Yes
5440
5441maxqueue <maxqueue>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005442 The "maxqueue" parameter specifies the maximal number of connections which
5443 will wait in the queue for this server. If this limit is reached, next
5444 requests will be redispatched to other servers instead of indefinitely
5445 waiting to be served. This will break persistence but may allow people to
5446 quickly re-log in when the server they try to connect to is dying. The
5447 default value is "0" which means the queue is unlimited. See also the
5448 "maxconn" and "minconn" parameters.
5449
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005450 Supported in default-server: Yes
5451
5452minconn <minconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005453 When the "minconn" parameter is set, the maxconn limit becomes a dynamic
5454 limit following the backend's load. The server will always accept at least
5455 <minconn> connections, never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on
5456 the ramp between both values when the backend has less than <fullconn>
5457 concurrent connections. This makes it possible to limit the load on the
5458 server during normal loads, but push it further for important loads without
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005459 overloading the server during exceptional loads. See also the "maxconn"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005460 and "maxqueue" parameters, as well as the "fullconn" backend keyword.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005461
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005462 Supported in default-server: Yes
5463
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005464observe <mode>
5465 This option enables health adjusting based on observing communication with
5466 the server. By default this functionality is disabled and enabling it also
5467 requires to enable health checks. There are two supported modes: "layer4" and
5468 "layer7". In layer4 mode, only successful/unsuccessful tcp connections are
5469 significant. In layer7, which is only allowed for http proxies, responses
5470 received from server are verified, like valid/wrong http code, unparsable
5471 headers, a timeout, etc.
5472
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005473 Supported in default-server: No
5474
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005475 See also the "check", "on-error" and "error-limit".
5476
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005477on-error <mode>
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005478 Select what should happen when enough consecutive errors are detected.
5479 Currently, four modes are available:
5480 - fastinter: force fastinter
5481 - fail-check: simulate a failed check, also forces fastinter (default)
5482 - sudden-death: simulate a pre-fatal failed health check, one more failed
5483 check will mark a server down, forces fastinter
5484 - mark-down: mark the server immediately down and force fastinter
5485
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005486 Supported in default-server: Yes
5487
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005488 See also the "check", "observe" and "error-limit".
5489
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005490port <port>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005491 Using the "port" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different port to
5492 send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate a port
5493 to a specific component able to perform complex tests which are more suitable
5494 to health-checks than the application. It is common to run a simple script in
5495 inetd for instance. This parameter is ignored if the "check" parameter is not
5496 set. See also the "addr" parameter.
5497
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005498 Supported in default-server: Yes
5499
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005500redir <prefix>
5501 The "redir" parameter enables the redirection mode for all GET and HEAD
5502 requests addressing this server. This means that instead of having HAProxy
5503 forward the request to the server, it will send an "HTTP 302" response with
5504 the "Location" header composed of this prefix immediately followed by the
5505 requested URI beginning at the leading '/' of the path component. That means
5506 that no trailing slash should be used after <prefix>. All invalid requests
5507 will be rejected, and all non-GET or HEAD requests will be normally served by
5508 the server. Note that since the response is completely forged, no header
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005509 mangling nor cookie insertion is possible in the response. However, cookies in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005510 requests are still analysed, making this solution completely usable to direct
5511 users to a remote location in case of local disaster. Main use consists in
5512 increasing bandwidth for static servers by having the clients directly
5513 connect to them. Note: never use a relative location here, it would cause a
5514 loop between the client and HAProxy!
5515
5516 Example : server srv1 192.168.1.1:80 redir http://image1.mydomain.com check
5517
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005518 Supported in default-server: No
5519
5520rise <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005521 The "rise" parameter states that a server will be considered as operational
5522 after <count> consecutive successful health checks. This value defaults to 2
5523 if unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "fall" parameters.
5524
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005525 Supported in default-server: Yes
5526
5527slowstart <start_time_in_ms>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005528 The "slowstart" parameter for a server accepts a value in milliseconds which
5529 indicates after how long a server which has just come back up will run at
5530 full speed. Just as with every other time-based parameter, it can be entered
5531 in any other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The speed grows
5532 linearly from 0 to 100% during this time. The limitation applies to two
5533 parameters :
5534
5535 - maxconn: the number of connections accepted by the server will grow from 1
5536 to 100% of the usual dynamic limit defined by (minconn,maxconn,fullconn).
5537
5538 - weight: when the backend uses a dynamic weighted algorithm, the weight
5539 grows linearly from 1 to 100%. In this case, the weight is updated at every
5540 health-check. For this reason, it is important that the "inter" parameter
5541 is smaller than the "slowstart", in order to maximize the number of steps.
5542
5543 The slowstart never applies when haproxy starts, otherwise it would cause
5544 trouble to running servers. It only applies when a server has been previously
5545 seen as failed.
5546
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005547 Supported in default-server: Yes
5548
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005549source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
5550source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [interface <name>] ...
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005551 The "source" parameter sets the source address which will be used when
5552 connecting to the server. It follows the exact same parameters and principle
5553 as the backend "source" keyword, except that it only applies to the server
5554 referencing it. Please consult the "source" keyword for details.
5555
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005556 Additionally, the "source" statement on a server line allows one to specify a
5557 source port range by indicating the lower and higher bounds delimited by a
5558 dash ('-'). Some operating systems might require a valid IP address when a
5559 source port range is specified. It is permitted to have the same IP/range for
5560 several servers. Doing so makes it possible to bypass the maximum of 64k
5561 total concurrent connections. The limit will then reach 64k connections per
5562 server.
5563
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005564 Supported in default-server: No
5565
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005566track [<proxy>/]<server>
5567 This option enables ability to set the current state of the server by
5568 tracking another one. Only a server with checks enabled can be tracked
5569 so it is not possible for example to track a server that tracks another
5570 one. If <proxy> is omitted the current one is used. If disable-on-404 is
5571 used, it has to be enabled on both proxies.
5572
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005573 Supported in default-server: No
5574
5575weight <weight>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005576 The "weight" parameter is used to adjust the server's weight relative to
5577 other servers. All servers will receive a load proportional to their weight
5578 relative to the sum of all weights, so the higher the weight, the higher the
Willy Tarreau6704d672009-06-15 10:56:05 +02005579 load. The default weight is 1, and the maximal value is 256. A value of 0
5580 means the server will not participate in load-balancing but will still accept
5581 persistent connections. If this parameter is used to distribute the load
5582 according to server's capacity, it is recommended to start with values which
5583 can both grow and shrink, for instance between 10 and 100 to leave enough
5584 room above and below for later adjustments.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005585
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005586 Supported in default-server: Yes
5587
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005588
55896. HTTP header manipulation
5590---------------------------
5591
5592In HTTP mode, it is possible to rewrite, add or delete some of the request and
5593response headers based on regular expressions. It is also possible to block a
5594request or a response if a particular header matches a regular expression,
5595which is enough to stop most elementary protocol attacks, and to protect
5596against information leak from the internal network. But there is a limitation
5597to this : since HAProxy's HTTP engine does not support keep-alive, only headers
5598passed during the first request of a TCP session will be seen. All subsequent
5599headers will be considered data only and not analyzed. Furthermore, HAProxy
5600never touches data contents, it stops analysis at the end of headers.
5601
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005602There is an exception though. If HAProxy encounters an "Informational Response"
5603(status code 1xx), it is able to process all rsp* rules which can allow, deny,
5604rewrite or delete a header, but it will refuse to add a header to any such
5605messages as this is not HTTP-compliant. The reason for still processing headers
5606in such responses is to stop and/or fix any possible information leak which may
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005607happen, for instance because another downstream equipment would unconditionally
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005608add a header, or if a server name appears there. When such messages are seen,
5609normal processing still occurs on the next non-informational messages.
5610
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005611This section covers common usage of the following keywords, described in detail
5612in section 4.2 :
5613
5614 - reqadd <string>
5615 - reqallow <search>
5616 - reqiallow <search>
5617 - reqdel <search>
5618 - reqidel <search>
5619 - reqdeny <search>
5620 - reqideny <search>
5621 - reqpass <search>
5622 - reqipass <search>
5623 - reqrep <search> <replace>
5624 - reqirep <search> <replace>
5625 - reqtarpit <search>
5626 - reqitarpit <search>
5627 - rspadd <string>
5628 - rspdel <search>
5629 - rspidel <search>
5630 - rspdeny <search>
5631 - rspideny <search>
5632 - rsprep <search> <replace>
5633 - rspirep <search> <replace>
5634
5635With all these keywords, the same conventions are used. The <search> parameter
5636is a POSIX extended regular expression (regex) which supports grouping through
5637parenthesis (without the backslash). Spaces and other delimiters must be
5638prefixed with a backslash ('\') to avoid confusion with a field delimiter.
5639Other characters may be prefixed with a backslash to change their meaning :
5640
5641 \t for a tab
5642 \r for a carriage return (CR)
5643 \n for a new line (LF)
5644 \ to mark a space and differentiate it from a delimiter
5645 \# to mark a sharp and differentiate it from a comment
5646 \\ to use a backslash in a regex
5647 \\\\ to use a backslash in the text (*2 for regex, *2 for haproxy)
5648 \xXX to write the ASCII hex code XX as in the C language
5649
5650The <replace> parameter contains the string to be used to replace the largest
5651portion of text matching the regex. It can make use of the special characters
5652above, and can reference a substring which is delimited by parenthesis in the
5653regex, by writing a backslash ('\') immediately followed by one digit from 0 to
56549 indicating the group position (0 designating the entire line). This practice
5655is very common to users of the "sed" program.
5656
5657The <string> parameter represents the string which will systematically be added
5658after the last header line. It can also use special character sequences above.
5659
5660Notes related to these keywords :
5661---------------------------------
5662 - these keywords are not always convenient to allow/deny based on header
5663 contents. It is strongly recommended to use ACLs with the "block" keyword
5664 instead, resulting in far more flexible and manageable rules.
5665
5666 - lines are always considered as a whole. It is not possible to reference
5667 a header name only or a value only. This is important because of the way
5668 headers are written (notably the number of spaces after the colon).
5669
5670 - the first line is always considered as a header, which makes it possible to
5671 rewrite or filter HTTP requests URIs or response codes, but in turn makes
5672 it harder to distinguish between headers and request line. The regex prefix
5673 ^[^\ \t]*[\ \t] matches any HTTP method followed by a space, and the prefix
5674 ^[^ \t:]*: matches any header name followed by a colon.
5675
5676 - for performances reasons, the number of characters added to a request or to
5677 a response is limited at build time to values between 1 and 4 kB. This
5678 should normally be far more than enough for most usages. If it is too short
5679 on occasional usages, it is possible to gain some space by removing some
5680 useless headers before adding new ones.
5681
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005682 - keywords beginning with "reqi" and "rspi" are the same as their counterpart
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005683 without the 'i' letter except that they ignore case when matching patterns.
5684
5685 - when a request passes through a frontend then a backend, all req* rules
5686 from the frontend will be evaluated, then all req* rules from the backend
5687 will be evaluated. The reverse path is applied to responses.
5688
5689 - req* statements are applied after "block" statements, so that "block" is
5690 always the first one, but before "use_backend" in order to permit rewriting
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005691 before switching.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005692
5693
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010056947. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
5695------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005696
5697The use of Access Control Lists (ACL) provides a flexible solution to perform
5698content switching and generally to take decisions based on content extracted
5699from the request, the response or any environmental status. The principle is
5700simple :
5701
5702 - define test criteria with sets of values
5703 - perform actions only if a set of tests is valid
5704
5705The actions generally consist in blocking the request, or selecting a backend.
5706
5707In order to define a test, the "acl" keyword is used. The syntax is :
5708
5709 acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
5710
5711This creates a new ACL <aclname> or completes an existing one with new tests.
5712Those tests apply to the portion of request/response specified in <criterion>
5713and may be adjusted with optional flags [flags]. Some criteria also support
5714an operator which may be specified before the set of values. The values are
5715of the type supported by the criterion, and are separated by spaces.
5716
5717ACL names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits, '-' (dash),
5718'_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are case-sensitive,
5719which means that "my_acl" and "My_Acl" are two different ACLs.
5720
5721There is no enforced limit to the number of ACLs. The unused ones do not affect
5722performance, they just consume a small amount of memory.
5723
5724The following ACL flags are currently supported :
5725
5726 -i : ignore case during matching.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005727 -- : force end of flags. Useful when a string looks like one of the flags.
5728
5729Supported types of values are :
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005730
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005731 - integers or integer ranges
5732 - strings
5733 - regular expressions
5734 - IP addresses and networks
5735
5736
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057377.1. Matching integers
5738----------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005739
5740Matching integers is special in that ranges and operators are permitted. Note
5741that integer matching only applies to positive values. A range is a value
5742expressed with a lower and an upper bound separated with a colon, both of which
5743may be omitted.
5744
5745For instance, "1024:65535" is a valid range to represent a range of
5746unprivileged ports, and "1024:" would also work. "0:1023" is a valid
5747representation of privileged ports, and ":1023" would also work.
5748
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005749As a special case, some ACL functions support decimal numbers which are in fact
5750two integers separated by a dot. This is used with some version checks for
5751instance. All integer properties apply to those decimal numbers, including
5752ranges and operators.
5753
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005754For an easier usage, comparison operators are also supported. Note that using
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005755operators with ranges does not make much sense and is strongly discouraged.
5756Similarly, it does not make much sense to perform order comparisons with a set
5757of values.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005758
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005759Available operators for integer matching are :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005760
5761 eq : true if the tested value equals at least one value
5762 ge : true if the tested value is greater than or equal to at least one value
5763 gt : true if the tested value is greater than at least one value
5764 le : true if the tested value is less than or equal to at least one value
5765 lt : true if the tested value is less than at least one value
5766
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005767For instance, the following ACL matches any negative Content-Length header :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005768
5769 acl negative-length hdr_val(content-length) lt 0
5770
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005771This one matches SSL versions between 3.0 and 3.1 (inclusive) :
5772
5773 acl sslv3 req_ssl_ver 3:3.1
5774
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005775
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057767.2. Matching strings
5777---------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005778
5779String matching applies to verbatim strings as they are passed, with the
5780exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it possible to escape some
5781characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is passed before the first
5782string, then the matching will be performed ignoring the case. In order
5783to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass the "--" flag
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005784before the first string. Same applies of course to match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005785
5786
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057877.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
5788-------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005789
5790Just like with string matching, regex matching applies to verbatim strings as
5791they are passed, with the exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it
5792possible to escape some characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is
5793passed before the first regex, then the matching will be performed ignoring
5794the case. In order to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005795the "--" flag before the first string. Same principle applies of course to
5796match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005797
5798
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057997.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
5800----------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005801
5802IPv4 addresses values can be specified either as plain addresses or with a
5803netmask appended, in which case the IPv4 address matches whenever it is
5804within the network. Plain addresses may also be replaced with a resolvable
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005805host name, but this practice is generally discouraged as it makes it more
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005806difficult to read and debug configurations. If hostnames are used, you should
5807at least ensure that they are present in /etc/hosts so that the configuration
5808does not depend on any random DNS match at the moment the configuration is
5809parsed.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005810
5811
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058127.5. Available matching criteria
5813--------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005814
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058157.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
5816------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005817
5818A first set of criteria applies to information which does not require any
5819analysis of the request or response contents. Those generally include TCP/IP
5820addresses and ports, as well as internal values independant on the stream.
5821
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005822always_false
5823 This one never matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5824 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5825
5826always_true
5827 This one always matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5828 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5829
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005830avg_queue <integer>
5831avg_queue(frontend) <integer>
5832 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend
5833 divided by the number of active servers. This is very similar to "queue"
5834 except that the size of the farm is considered, in order to give a more
5835 accurate measurement of the time it may take for a new connection to be
5836 processed. The main usage is to return a sorry page to new users when it
5837 becomes certain they will get a degraded service. Note that in the event
5838 there would not be any active server anymore, we would consider twice the
5839 number of queued connections as the measured value. This is a fair estimate,
5840 as we expect one server to get back soon anyway, but we still prefer to send
5841 new traffic to another backend if in better shape. See also the "queue",
5842 "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki346f76d2010-01-12 21:59:30 +01005843
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005844be_conn <integer>
5845be_conn(frontend) <integer>
5846 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the backend,
5847 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no backend name is
5848 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
5849 backend. It can be used to use a specific farm when the nominal one is full.
5850 See also the "fe_conn", "queue" and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005851
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005852be_sess_rate <integer>
5853be_sess_rate(backend) <integer>
5854 Returns true when the sessions creation rate on the backend matches the
5855 specified values or ranges, in number of new sessions per second. This is
5856 used to switch to an alternate backend when an expensive or fragile one
5857 reaches too high a session rate, or to limit abuse of service (eg. prevent
5858 sucking of an online dictionary).
5859
5860 Example :
5861 # Redirect to an error page if the dictionary is requested too often
5862 backend dynamic
5863 mode http
5864 acl being_scanned be_sess_rate gt 100
5865 redirect location /denied.html if being_scanned
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005866
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005867connslots <integer>
5868connslots(backend) <integer>
5869 The basic idea here is to be able to measure the number of connection "slots"
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005870 still available (connection + queue), so that anything beyond that (intended
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005871 usage; see "use_backend" keyword) can be redirected to a different backend.
5872
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005873 'connslots' = number of available server connection slots, + number of
5874 available server queue slots.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005875
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005876 Note that while "fe_conn" may be used, "connslots" comes in especially
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005877 useful when you have a case of traffic going to one single ip, splitting into
5878 multiple backends (perhaps using acls to do name-based load balancing) and
5879 you want to be able to differentiate between different backends, and their
5880 available "connslots". Also, whereas "nbsrv" only measures servers that are
5881 actually *down*, this acl is more fine-grained and looks into the number of
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005882 available connection slots as well. See also "queue" and "avg_queue".
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005883
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005884 OTHER CAVEATS AND NOTES: at this point in time, the code does not take care
5885 of dynamic connections. Also, if any of the server maxconn, or maxqueue is 0,
5886 then this acl clearly does not make sense, in which case the value returned
5887 will be -1.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005888
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005889dst <ip_address>
5890 Applies to the local IPv4 address the client connected to. It can be used to
5891 switch to a different backend for some alternative addresses.
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005892
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005893dst_conn <integer>
5894 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the same socket
5895 including the one being evaluated. It can be used to either return a sorry
5896 page before hard-blocking, or to use a specific backend to drain new requests
5897 when the socket is considered saturated. This offers the ability to assign
5898 different limits to different listening ports or addresses. See also the
5899 "fe_conn" and "be_conn" criteria.
5900
5901dst_port <integer>
5902 Applies to the local port the client connected to. It can be used to switch
5903 to a different backend for some alternative ports.
5904
5905fe_conn <integer>
5906fe_conn(frontend) <integer>
5907 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the frontend,
5908 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no frontend name is
5909 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
5910 frontend. It can be used to either return a sorry page before hard-blocking,
5911 or to use a specific backend to drain new requests when the farm is
5912 considered saturated. See also the "dst_conn", "be_conn" and "fe_sess_rate"
5913 criteria.
5914
5915fe_id <integer>
5916 Applies to the fronted's id. Can be used in backends to check from which
5917 frontend it was called.
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005918
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005919fe_sess_rate <integer>
5920fe_sess_rate(frontend) <integer>
5921 Returns true when the session creation rate on the current or the named
5922 frontend matches the specified values or ranges, expressed in new sessions
5923 per second. This is used to limit the connection rate to acceptable ranges in
5924 order to prevent abuse of service at the earliest moment. This can be
5925 combined with layer 4 ACLs in order to force the clients to wait a bit for
5926 the rate to go down below the limit.
5927
5928 Example :
5929 # This frontend limits incoming mails to 10/s with a max of 100
5930 # concurrent connections. We accept any connection below 10/s, and
5931 # force excess clients to wait for 100 ms. Since clients are limited to
5932 # 100 max, there cannot be more than 10 incoming mails per second.
5933 frontend mail
5934 bind :25
5935 mode tcp
5936 maxconn 100
5937 acl too_fast fe_sess_rate ge 10
5938 tcp-request inspect-delay 100ms
5939 tcp-request content accept if ! too_fast
5940 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005941
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005942nbsrv <integer>
5943nbsrv(backend) <integer>
5944 Returns true when the number of usable servers of either the current backend
5945 or the named backend matches the values or ranges specified. This is used to
5946 switch to an alternate backend when the number of servers is too low to
5947 to handle some load. It is useful to report a failure when combined with
5948 "monitor fail".
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005949
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005950queue <integer>
5951queue(frontend) <integer>
5952 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend,
5953 including all the connections in server queues. If no backend name is
5954 specified, the current one is used, but it is also possible to check another
5955 one. This can be used to take actions when queuing goes above a known level,
5956 generally indicating a surge of traffic or a massive slowdown on the servers.
5957 One possible action could be to reject new users but still accept old ones.
5958 See also the "avg_queue", "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
5959
5960so_id <integer>
5961 Applies to the socket's id. Useful in frontends with many bind keywords.
5962
5963src <ip_address>
5964 Applies to the client's IPv4 address. It is usually used to limit access to
5965 certain resources such as statistics. Note that it is the TCP-level source
5966 address which is used, and not the address of a client behind a proxy.
5967
5968src_port <integer>
5969 Applies to the client's TCP source port. This has a very limited usage.
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005970
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005971
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059727.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
5973-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005974
5975A second set of criteria depends on data found in buffers, but which can change
5976during analysis. This requires that some data has been buffered, for instance
5977through TCP request content inspection. Please see the "tcp-request" keyword
5978for more detailed information on the subject.
5979
5980req_len <integer>
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02005981 Returns true when the length of the data in the request buffer matches the
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005982 specified range. It is important to understand that this test does not
5983 return false as long as the buffer is changing. This means that a check with
5984 equality to zero will almost always immediately match at the beginning of the
5985 session, while a test for more data will wait for that data to come in and
5986 return false only when haproxy is certain that no more data will come in.
5987 This test was designed to be used with TCP request content inspection.
5988
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02005989req_proto_http
5990 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like HTTP and correctly
5991 parses as such. It is the same parser as the common HTTP request parser which
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005992 is used so there should be no surprises. This test can be used for instance
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02005993 to direct HTTP traffic to a given port and HTTPS traffic to another one
5994 using TCP request content inspection rules.
5995
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02005996req_rdp_cookie <string>
5997req_rdp_cookie(name) <string>
5998 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol, and
5999 a cookie is present and equal to <string>. By default, any cookie name is
6000 checked, but a specific cookie name can be specified in parenthesis. The
6001 parser only checks for the first cookie, as illustrated in the RDP protocol
6002 specification. The cookie name is case insensitive. This ACL can be useful
6003 with the "MSTS" cookie, as it can contain the user name of the client
6004 connecting to the server if properly configured on the client. This can be
6005 used to restrict access to certain servers to certain users.
6006
6007req_rdp_cookie_cnt <integer>
6008req_rdp_cookie_cnt(name) <integer>
6009 Returns true when the data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol
6010 and the number of RDP cookies matches the specified range (typically zero or
6011 one). Optionally a specific cookie name can be checked. This is a simple way
6012 of detecting the RDP protocol, as clients generally send the MSTS or MSTSHASH
6013 cookies.
6014
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006015req_ssl_ver <decimal>
6016 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like SSL, with a protocol
6017 version matching the specified range. Both SSLv2 hello messages and SSLv3
6018 messages are supported. The test tries to be strict enough to avoid being
6019 easily fooled. In particular, it waits for as many bytes as announced in the
6020 message header if this header looks valid (bound to the buffer size). Note
6021 that TLSv1 is announced as SSL version 3.1. This test was designed to be used
6022 with TCP request content inspection.
6023
Willy Tarreaub6fb4202008-07-20 11:18:28 +02006024wait_end
6025 Waits for the end of the analysis period to return true. This may be used in
6026 conjunction with content analysis to avoid returning a wrong verdict early.
6027 It may also be used to delay some actions, such as a delayed reject for some
6028 special addresses. Since it either stops the rules evaluation or immediately
6029 returns true, it is recommended to use this acl as the last one in a rule.
6030 Please note that the default ACL "WAIT_END" is always usable without prior
6031 declaration. This test was designed to be used with TCP request content
6032 inspection.
6033
6034 Examples :
6035 # delay every incoming request by 2 seconds
6036 tcp-request inspect-delay 2s
6037 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
6038
6039 # don't immediately tell bad guys they are rejected
6040 tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
6041 acl goodguys src 10.0.0.0/24
6042 acl badguys src 10.0.1.0/24
6043 tcp-request content accept if goodguys
6044 tcp-request content reject if badguys WAIT_END
6045 tcp-request content reject
6046
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006047
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060487.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
6049--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006050
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006051A third set of criteria applies to information which can be found at the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006052application layer (layer 7). Those require that a full HTTP request has been
6053read, and are only evaluated then. They may require slightly more CPU resources
6054than the layer 4 ones, but not much since the request and response are indexed.
6055
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006056hdr <string>
6057hdr(header) <string>
6058 Note: all the "hdr*" matching criteria either apply to all headers, or to a
6059 particular header whose name is passed between parenthesis and without any
6060 space. The header name is not case-sensitive. The header matching complies
6061 with RFC2616, and treats as separate headers all values delimited by commas.
6062 Use the shdr() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6063
6064 The "hdr" criteria returns true if any of the headers matching the criteria
6065 match any of the strings. This can be used to check exact for values. For
6066 instance, checking that "connection: close" is set :
6067
6068 hdr(Connection) -i close
6069
6070hdr_beg <string>
6071hdr_beg(header) <string>
6072 Returns true when one of the headers begins with one of the strings. See
6073 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_beg() variant for
6074 response headers sent by the server.
6075
6076hdr_cnt <integer>
6077hdr_cnt(header) <integer>
6078 Returns true when the number of occurrence of the specified header matches
6079 the values or ranges specified. It is important to remember that one header
6080 line may count as several headers if it has several values. This is used to
6081 detect presence, absence or abuse of a specific header, as well as to block
6082 request smuggling attacks by rejecting requests which contain more than one
6083 of certain headers. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use
6084 the shdr_cnt() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6085
6086hdr_dir <string>
6087hdr_dir(header) <string>
6088 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6089 isolated or delimited by slashes. This is used to perform filename or
6090 directory name matching, and may be used with Referer. See "hdr" for more
6091 information on header matching. Use the shdr_dir() variant for response
6092 headers sent by the server.
6093
6094hdr_dom <string>
6095hdr_dom(header) <string>
6096 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6097 isolated or delimited by dots. This is used to perform domain name matching,
6098 and may be used with the Host header. See "hdr" for more information on
6099 header matching. Use the shdr_dom() variant for response headers sent by the
6100 server.
6101
6102hdr_end <string>
6103hdr_end(header) <string>
6104 Returns true when one of the headers ends with one of the strings. See "hdr"
6105 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_end() variant for
6106 response headers sent by the server.
6107
6108hdr_ip <ip_address>
6109hdr_ip(header) <ip_address>
6110 Returns true when one of the headers' values contains an IP address matching
6111 <ip_address>. This is mainly used with headers such as X-Forwarded-For or
6112 X-Client-IP. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the
6113 shdr_ip() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6114
6115hdr_reg <regex>
6116hdr_reg(header) <regex>
6117 Returns true when one of the headers matches of the regular expressions. It
6118 can be used at any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching
6119 is slower than other methods. See also other "hdr_" criteria, as well as
6120 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_reg() variant for
6121 response headers sent by the server.
6122
6123hdr_sub <string>
6124hdr_sub(header) <string>
6125 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings. See "hdr"
6126 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_sub() variant for
6127 response headers sent by the server.
6128
6129hdr_val <integer>
6130hdr_val(header) <integer>
6131 Returns true when one of the headers starts with a number which matches the
6132 values or ranges specified. This may be used to limit content-length to
6133 acceptable values for example. See "hdr" for more information on header
6134 matching. Use the shdr_val() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6135
6136http_auth(userlist)
6137http_auth_group(userlist) <group> [<group>]*
6138 Returns true when authentication data received from the client matches
6139 username & password stored on the userlist. It is also possible to
6140 use http_auth_group to check if the user is assigned to at least one
6141 of specified groups.
6142
6143 Currently only http basic auth is supported.
6144
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006145method <string>
6146 Applies to the method in the HTTP request, eg: "GET". Some predefined ACL
6147 already check for most common methods.
6148
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006149path <string>
6150 Returns true when the path part of the request, which starts at the first
6151 slash and ends before the question mark, equals one of the strings. It may be
6152 used to match known files, such as /favicon.ico.
6153
6154path_beg <string>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006155 Returns true when the path begins with one of the strings. This can be used
6156 to send certain directory names to alternative backends.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006157
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006158path_dir <string>
6159 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6160 slashes in the path. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6161 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6162 "url_dir" and "path_sub".
6163
6164path_dom <string>
6165 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6166 in the path. This may be used to perform domain name matching in proxy
6167 requests. See also "path_sub" and "url_dom".
6168
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006169path_end <string>
6170 Returns true when the path ends with one of the strings. This may be used to
6171 control file name extension.
6172
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006173path_reg <regex>
6174 Returns true when the path matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6175 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6176 than other methods. See also "url_reg" and all "path_" criteria.
6177
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006178path_sub <string>
6179 Returns true when the path contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6180 detect particular patterns in paths, such as "../" for example. See also
6181 "path_dir".
6182
6183req_ver <string>
6184 Applies to the version string in the HTTP request, eg: "1.0". Some predefined
6185 ACL already check for versions 1.0 and 1.1.
6186
6187status <integer>
6188 Applies to the HTTP status code in the HTTP response, eg: "302". It can be
6189 used to act on responses depending on status ranges, for instance, remove
6190 any Location header if the response is not a 3xx.
6191
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006192url <string>
6193 Applies to the whole URL passed in the request. The only real use is to match
6194 "*", for which there already is a predefined ACL.
6195
6196url_beg <string>
6197 Returns true when the URL begins with one of the strings. This can be used to
6198 check whether a URL begins with a slash or with a protocol scheme.
6199
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006200url_dir <string>
6201 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6202 slashes in the URL. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6203 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6204 "path_dir" and "url_sub".
6205
6206url_dom <string>
6207 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6208 in the URL. This is used to perform domain name matching without the risk of
6209 wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also "url_sub".
6210
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006211url_end <string>
6212 Returns true when the URL ends with one of the strings. It has very limited
6213 use. "path_end" should be used instead for filename matching.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006214
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006215url_ip <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006216 Applies to the IP address specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request.
6217 It can be used to prevent access to certain resources such as local network.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006218 It is useful with option "http_proxy".
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006219
6220url_port <integer>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006221 Applies to the port specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request. It can
6222 be used to prevent access to certain resources. It is useful with option
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006223 "http_proxy". Note that if the port is not specified in the request, port 80
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006224 is assumed.
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006225
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006226url_reg <regex>
6227 Returns true when the URL matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6228 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6229 than other methods. See also "path_reg" and all "url_" criteria.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006230
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006231url_sub <string>
6232 Returns true when the URL contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6233 detect particular patterns in query strings for example. See also "path_sub".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006234
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006235
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020062367.6. Pre-defined ACLs
6237---------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006238
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006239Some predefined ACLs are hard-coded so that they do not have to be declared in
6240every frontend which needs them. They all have their names in upper case in
6241order to avoid confusion. Their equivalence is provided below. Please note that
6242only the first three ones are not layer 7 based.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006243
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006244ACL name Equivalent to Usage
6245---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006246FALSE always_false never match
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006247HTTP req_proto_http match if protocol is valid HTTP
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006248HTTP_1.0 req_ver 1.0 match HTTP version 1.0
6249HTTP_1.1 req_ver 1.1 match HTTP version 1.1
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006250HTTP_CONTENT hdr_val(content-length) gt 0 match an existing content-length
6251HTTP_URL_ABS url_reg ^[^/:]*:// match absolute URL with scheme
6252HTTP_URL_SLASH url_beg / match URL beginning with "/"
6253HTTP_URL_STAR url * match URL equal to "*"
6254LOCALHOST src 127.0.0.1/8 match connection from local host
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006255METH_CONNECT method CONNECT match HTTP CONNECT method
6256METH_GET method GET HEAD match HTTP GET or HEAD method
6257METH_HEAD method HEAD match HTTP HEAD method
6258METH_OPTIONS method OPTIONS match HTTP OPTIONS method
6259METH_POST method POST match HTTP POST method
6260METH_TRACE method TRACE match HTTP TRACE method
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006261RDP_COOKIE req_rdp_cookie_cnt gt 0 match presence of an RDP cookie
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006262REQ_CONTENT req_len gt 0 match data in the request buffer
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006263TRUE always_true always match
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006264WAIT_END wait_end wait for end of content analysis
6265---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006266
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006267
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020062687.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
6269----------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006270
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006271Some actions are only performed upon a valid condition. A condition is a
6272combination of ACLs with operators. 3 operators are supported :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006273
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006274 - AND (implicit)
6275 - OR (explicit with the "or" keyword or the "||" operator)
6276 - Negation with the exclamation mark ("!")
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006277
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006278A condition is formed as a disjunctive form:
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006279
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006280 [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln { or [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln } ...
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006281
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006282Such conditions are generally used after an "if" or "unless" statement,
6283indicating when the condition will trigger the action.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006284
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006285For instance, to block HTTP requests to the "*" URL with methods other than
6286"OPTIONS", as well as POST requests without content-length, and GET or HEAD
6287requests with a content-length greater than 0, and finally every request which
6288is not either GET/HEAD/POST/OPTIONS !
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006289
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006290 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6291 block if HTTP_URL_STAR !METH_OPTIONS || METH_POST missing_cl
6292 block if METH_GET HTTP_CONTENT
6293 block unless METH_GET or METH_POST or METH_OPTIONS
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006294
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006295To select a different backend for requests to static contents on the "www" site
6296and to every request on the "img", "video", "download" and "ftp" hosts :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006297
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006298 acl url_static path_beg /static /images /img /css
6299 acl url_static path_end .gif .png .jpg .css .js
6300 acl host_www hdr_beg(host) -i www
6301 acl host_static hdr_beg(host) -i img. video. download. ftp.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006302
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006303 # now use backend "static" for all static-only hosts, and for static urls
6304 # of host "www". Use backend "www" for the rest.
6305 use_backend static if host_static or host_www url_static
6306 use_backend www if host_www
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006307
Willy Tarreau95fa4692010-02-01 13:05:50 +01006308It is also possible to form rules using "anonymous ACLs". Those are unnamed ACL
6309expressions that are built on the fly without needing to be declared. They must
6310be enclosed between braces, with a space before and after each brace (because
6311the braces must be seen as independant words). Example :
6312
6313 The following rule :
6314
6315 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6316 block if METH_POST missing_cl
6317
6318 Can also be written that way :
6319
6320 block if METH_POST { hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0 }
6321
6322It is generally not recommended to use this construct because it's a lot easier
6323to leave errors in the configuration when written that way. However, for very
6324simple rules matching only one source IP address for instance, it can make more
6325sense to use them than to declare ACLs with random names. Another example of
6326good use is the following :
6327
6328 With named ACLs :
6329
6330 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
6331 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
6332 monitor fail if site_dead
6333
6334 With anonymous ACLs :
6335
6336 monitor fail if { nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2 } || { nbsrv(static) lt 2 }
6337
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006338See section 4.2 for detailed help on the "block" and "use_backend" keywords.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006339
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006340
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010063417.8. Pattern extraction
6342-----------------------
6343
6344The stickiness features relies on pattern extraction in the request and
6345response. Sometimes the data needs to be converted first before being stored,
6346for instance converted from ASCII to IP or upper case to lower case.
6347
6348All these operations of data extraction and conversion are defined as
6349"pattern extraction rules". A pattern rule always has the same format. It
6350begins with a single pattern fetch word, potentially followed by a list of
6351arguments within parenthesis then an optional list of transformations. As
6352much as possible, the pattern fetch functions use the same name as their
6353equivalent used in ACLs.
6354
6355The list of currently supported pattern fetch functions is the following :
6356
6357 src This is the source IPv4 address of the client of the session.
6358 It is of type IP and only works with such tables.
6359
6360 dst This is the destination IPv4 address of the session on the
6361 client side, which is the address the client connected to.
6362 It can be useful when running in transparent mode. It is of
6363 typie IP and only works with such tables.
6364
6365 dst_port This is the destination TCP port of the session on the client
6366 side, which is the port the client connected to. This might be
6367 used when running in transparent mode or when assigning dynamic
6368 ports to some clients for a whole application session. It is of
6369 type integer and only works with such tables.
6370
6371
6372The currently available list of transformations include :
6373
6374 lower Convert a string pattern to lower case. This can only be placed
6375 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6376 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6377
6378 upper Convert a string pattern to upper case. This can only be placed
6379 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6380 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6381
Willy Tarreaud31d6eb2010-01-26 18:01:41 +01006382 ipmask(mask) Apply a mask to an IPv4 address, and use the result for lookups
6383 and storage. This can be used to make all hosts within a
6384 certain mask to share the same table entries and as such use
6385 the same server. The mask can be passed in dotted form (eg:
6386 255.255.255.0) or in CIDR form (eg: 24).
6387
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01006388
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020063898. Logging
6390----------
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01006391
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006392One of HAProxy's strong points certainly lies is its precise logs. It probably
6393provides the finest level of information available for such a product, which is
6394very important for troubleshooting complex environments. Standard information
6395provided in logs include client ports, TCP/HTTP state timers, precise session
6396state at termination and precise termination cause, information about decisions
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006397to direct traffic to a server, and of course the ability to capture arbitrary
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006398headers.
6399
6400In order to improve administrators reactivity, it offers a great transparency
6401about encountered problems, both internal and external, and it is possible to
6402send logs to different sources at the same time with different level filters :
6403
6404 - global process-level logs (system errors, start/stop, etc..)
6405 - per-instance system and internal errors (lack of resource, bugs, ...)
6406 - per-instance external troubles (servers up/down, max connections)
6407 - per-instance activity (client connections), either at the establishment or
6408 at the termination.
6409
6410The ability to distribute different levels of logs to different log servers
6411allow several production teams to interact and to fix their problems as soon
6412as possible. For example, the system team might monitor system-wide errors,
6413while the application team might be monitoring the up/down for their servers in
6414real time, and the security team might analyze the activity logs with one hour
6415delay.
6416
6417
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064188.1. Log levels
6419---------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006420
6421TCP and HTTP connections can be logged with informations such as date, time,
6422source IP address, destination address, connection duration, response times,
6423HTTP request, the HTTP return code, number of bytes transmitted, the conditions
6424in which the session ended, and even exchanged cookies values, to track a
6425particular user's problems for example. All messages are sent to up to two
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006426syslog servers. Check the "log" keyword in section 4.2 for more info about log
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006427facilities.
6428
6429
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064308.2. Log formats
6431----------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006432
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006433HAProxy supports 4 log formats. Several fields are common between these formats
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006434and will be detailed in the next sections. A few of them may slightly vary with
6435the configuration, due to indicators specific to certain options. The supported
6436formats are the following ones :
6437
6438 - the default format, which is very basic and very rarely used. It only
6439 provides very basic information about the incoming connection at the moment
6440 it is accepted : source IP:port, destination IP:port, and frontend-name.
6441 This mode will eventually disappear so it will not be described to great
6442 extents.
6443
6444 - the TCP format, which is more advanced. This format is enabled when "option
6445 tcplog" is set on the frontend. HAProxy will then usually wait for the
6446 connection to terminate before logging. This format provides much richer
6447 information, such as timers, connection counts, queue size, etc... This
6448 format is recommended for pure TCP proxies.
6449
6450 - the HTTP format, which is the most advanced for HTTP proxying. This format
6451 is enabled when "option httplog" is set on the frontend. It provides the
6452 same information as the TCP format with some HTTP-specific fields such as
6453 the request, the status code, and captures of headers and cookies. This
6454 format is recommended for HTTP proxies.
6455
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006456 - the CLF HTTP format, which is equivalent to the HTTP format, but with the
6457 fields arranged in the same order as the CLF format. In this mode, all
6458 timers, captures, flags, etc... appear one per field after the end of the
6459 common fields, in the same order they appear in the standard HTTP format.
6460
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006461Next sections will go deeper into details for each of these formats. Format
6462specification will be performed on a "field" basis. Unless stated otherwise, a
6463field is a portion of text delimited by any number of spaces. Since syslog
6464servers are susceptible of inserting fields at the beginning of a line, it is
6465always assumed that the first field is the one containing the process name and
6466identifier.
6467
6468Note : Since log lines may be quite long, the log examples in sections below
6469 might be broken into multiple lines. The example log lines will be
6470 prefixed with 3 closing angle brackets ('>>>') and each time a log is
6471 broken into multiple lines, each non-final line will end with a
6472 backslash ('\') and the next line will start indented by two characters.
6473
6474
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064758.2.1. Default log format
6476-------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006477
6478This format is used when no specific option is set. The log is emitted as soon
6479as the connection is accepted. One should note that this currently is the only
6480format which logs the request's destination IP and ports.
6481
6482 Example :
6483 listen www
6484 mode http
6485 log global
6486 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6487
6488 >>> Feb 6 12:12:09 localhost \
6489 haproxy[14385]: Connect from 10.0.1.2:33312 to 10.0.3.31:8012 \
6490 (www/HTTP)
6491
6492 Field Format Extract from the example above
6493 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14385]:
6494 2 'Connect from' Connect from
6495 3 source_ip ':' source_port 10.0.1.2:33312
6496 4 'to' to
6497 5 destination_ip ':' destination_port 10.0.3.31:8012
6498 6 '(' frontend_name '/' mode ')' (www/HTTP)
6499
6500Detailed fields description :
6501 - "source_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the connection.
6502 - "source_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6503 - "destination_ip" is the IP address the client connected to.
6504 - "destination_port" is the TCP port the client connected to.
6505 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6506 and processed the connection.
6507 - "mode is the mode the frontend is operating (TCP or HTTP).
6508
6509It is advised not to use this deprecated format for newer installations as it
6510will eventually disappear.
6511
6512
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020065138.2.2. TCP log format
6514---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006515
6516The TCP format is used when "option tcplog" is specified in the frontend, and
6517is the recommended format for pure TCP proxies. It provides a lot of precious
6518information for troubleshooting. Since this format includes timers and byte
6519counts, the log is normally emitted at the end of the session. It can be
6520emitted earlier if "option logasap" is specified, which makes sense in most
6521environments with long sessions such as remote terminals. Sessions which match
6522the "monitor" rules are never logged. It is also possible not to emit logs for
6523sessions for which no data were exchanged between the client and the server, by
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006524specifying "option dontlognull" in the frontend. Successful connections will
6525not be logged if "option dontlog-normal" is specified in the frontend. A few
6526fields may slightly vary depending on some configuration options, those are
6527marked with a star ('*') after the field name below.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006528
6529 Example :
6530 frontend fnt
6531 mode tcp
6532 option tcplog
6533 log global
6534 default_backend bck
6535
6536 backend bck
6537 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6538
6539 >>> Feb 6 12:12:56 localhost \
6540 haproxy[14387]: 10.0.1.2:33313 [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443] fnt \
6541 bck/srv1 0/0/5007 212 -- 0/0/0/0/3 0/0
6542
6543 Field Format Extract from the example above
6544 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14387]:
6545 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33313
6546 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443]
6547 4 frontend_name fnt
6548 5 backend_name '/' server_name bck/srv1
6549 6 Tw '/' Tc '/' Tt* 0/0/5007
6550 7 bytes_read* 212
6551 8 termination_state --
6552 9 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 0/0/0/0/3
6553 10 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6554
6555Detailed fields description :
6556 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6557 connection to haproxy.
6558
6559 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6560
6561 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the connection was received by haproxy
6562 (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on the
6563 network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is usually
6564 the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log.
6565
6566 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6567 and processed the connection.
6568
6569 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6570 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6571 frontend if no switching rule has been applied, which is common for TCP
6572 applications.
6573
6574 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6575 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6576 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6577 which processed the request. If the connection was aborted before reaching
6578 a server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name.
6579
6580 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6581 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6582 See "Timers" below for more details.
6583
6584 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6585 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6586 connection was aborted before a connection could be established. See
6587 "Timers" below for more details.
6588
6589 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6590 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6591 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6592 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6593 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6594 details.
6595
6596 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted from the server to
6597 the client when the log is emitted. If "option logasap" is specified, the
6598 this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that the final one
6599 may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit counter, so log
6600 analysis tools must be able to handle it without overflowing.
6601
6602 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6603 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6604 session to happen, and for what reason (timeout, error, ...). The normal
6605 flags should be "--", indicating the session was closed by either end with
6606 no data remaining in buffers. See below "Session state at disconnection"
6607 for more details.
6608
6609 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6610 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6611 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 when
6612 multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system limits
6613 the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all of them
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006614 are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the system.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006615
6616 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6617 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6618 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6619 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6620 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6621 caused by a denial of service attack.
6622
6623 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6624 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6625 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6626 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6627 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6628 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6629 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6630 denial of service attack.
6631
6632 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6633 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6634 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6635 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6636 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6637 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6638 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6639 that this server has some trouble causing the connections to take longer to
6640 be processed than on other servers.
6641
6642 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6643 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6644 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6645 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6646 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6647 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6648 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6649 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6650 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6651 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6652 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6653 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6654 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6655
6656 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6657 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6658 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6659 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6660 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6661 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6662 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6663 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6664
6665 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6666 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6667 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6668 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6669 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6670 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6671 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6672 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6673 occurs.
6674
6675
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020066768.2.3. HTTP log format
6677----------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006678
6679The HTTP format is the most complete and the best suited for HTTP proxies. It
6680is enabled by when "option httplog" is specified in the frontend. It provides
6681the same level of information as the TCP format with additional features which
6682are specific to the HTTP protocol. Just like the TCP format, the log is usually
6683emitted at the end of the session, unless "option logasap" is specified, which
6684generally only makes sense for download sites. A session which matches the
6685"monitor" rules will never logged. It is also possible not to log sessions for
6686which no data were sent by the client by specifying "option dontlognull" in the
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006687frontend. Successful connections will not be logged if "option dontlog-normal"
6688is specified in the frontend.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006689
6690Most fields are shared with the TCP log, some being different. A few fields may
6691slightly vary depending on some configuration options. Those ones are marked
6692with a star ('*') after the field name below.
6693
6694 Example :
6695 frontend http-in
6696 mode http
6697 option httplog
6698 log global
6699 default_backend bck
6700
6701 backend static
6702 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6703
6704 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
6705 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
6706 static/srv1 10/0/30/69/109 200 2750 - - ---- 1/1/1/1/0 0/0 {1wt.eu} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006707 {} "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006708
6709 Field Format Extract from the example above
6710 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14389]:
6711 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33317
6712 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655]
6713 4 frontend_name http-in
6714 5 backend_name '/' server_name static/srv1
6715 6 Tq '/' Tw '/' Tc '/' Tr '/' Tt* 10/0/30/69/109
6716 7 status_code 200
6717 8 bytes_read* 2750
6718 9 captured_request_cookie -
6719 10 captured_response_cookie -
6720 11 termination_state ----
6721 12 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 1/1/1/1/0
6722 13 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6723 14 '{' captured_request_headers* '}' {haproxy.1wt.eu}
6724 15 '{' captured_response_headers* '}' {}
6725 16 '"' http_request '"' "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006726
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006727
6728Detailed fields description :
6729 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6730 connection to haproxy.
6731
6732 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6733
6734 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the TCP connection was received by
6735 haproxy (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on
6736 the network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is
6737 usually the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log. This
6738 does not depend on the fact that the client has sent the request or not.
6739
6740 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6741 and processed the connection.
6742
6743 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6744 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6745 frontend if no switching rule has been applied.
6746
6747 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6748 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6749 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6750 which processed the request. If the request was aborted before reaching a
6751 server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name. If the request was
6752 intercepted by the stats subsystem, "<STATS>" is indicated instead.
6753
6754 - "Tq" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the client to send
6755 a full HTTP request, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the connection
6756 was aborted before a complete request could be received. It should always
6757 be very small because a request generally fits in one single packet. Large
6758 times here generally indicate network trouble between the client and
6759 haproxy. See "Timers" below for more details.
6760
6761 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6762 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6763 See "Timers" below for more details.
6764
6765 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6766 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6767 request was aborted before a connection could be established. See "Timers"
6768 below for more details.
6769
6770 - "Tr" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the server to send
6771 a full HTTP response, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the request was
6772 aborted before a complete response could be received. It generally matches
6773 the server's processing time for the request, though it may be altered by
6774 the amount of data sent by the client to the server. Large times here on
6775 "GET" requests generally indicate an overloaded server. See "Timers" below
6776 for more details.
6777
6778 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6779 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6780 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6781 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6782 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6783 details.
6784
6785 - "status_code" is the HTTP status code returned to the client. This status
6786 is generally set by the server, but it might also be set by haproxy when
6787 the server cannot be reached or when its response is blocked by haproxy.
6788
6789 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted to the client when
6790 the log is emitted. This does include HTTP headers. If "option logasap" is
6791 specified, the this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that
6792 the final one may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit
6793 counter, so log analysis tools must be able to handle it without
6794 overflowing.
6795
6796 - "captured_request_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating that
6797 the client had this cookie in the request. The cookie name and its maximum
6798 length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend
6799 configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is not
6800 set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track session
6801 ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session crossing
6802 between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please consult
6803 the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
6804
6805 - "captured_response_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating
6806 that the server has returned a cookie with its response. The cookie name
6807 and its maximum length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the
6808 frontend configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is
6809 not set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track
6810 session ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session
6811 crossing between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please
6812 consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
6813
6814 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6815 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6816 session to happen, for what reason (timeout, error, ...), just like in TCP
6817 logs, and information about persistence operations on cookies in the last
6818 two characters. The normal flags should begin with "--", indicating the
6819 session was closed by either end with no data remaining in buffers. See
6820 below "Session state at disconnection" for more details.
6821
6822 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6823 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6824 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 or 1024
6825 when multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system
6826 limits the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006827 of them are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006828 system.
6829
6830 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6831 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6832 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6833 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6834 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6835 caused by a denial of service attack.
6836
6837 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6838 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6839 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6840 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6841 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6842 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6843 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6844 denial of service attack.
6845
6846 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6847 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6848 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6849 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6850 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6851 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6852 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6853 that this server has some trouble causing the requests to take longer to be
6854 processed than on other servers.
6855
6856 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6857 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6858 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6859 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6860 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6861 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6862 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6863 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6864 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6865 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6866 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6867 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6868 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6869
6870 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6871 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6872 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6873 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6874 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6875 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6876 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6877 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6878
6879 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6880 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6881 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6882 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6883 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6884 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6885 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6886 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6887 occurs.
6888
6889 - "captured_request_headers" is a list of headers captured in the request due
6890 to the presence of the "capture request header" statement in the frontend.
6891 Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar
6892 ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear, causing a
6893 shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this field may
6894 contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser than when
6895 it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and
6896 cookies" below for more details.
6897
6898 - "captured_response_headers" is a list of headers captured in the response
6899 due to the presence of the "capture response header" statement in the
6900 frontend. Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a
6901 vertical bar ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear,
6902 causing a shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this
6903 field may contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser
6904 than when it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers
6905 and cookies" below for more details.
6906
6907 - "http_request" is the complete HTTP request line, including the method,
6908 request and HTTP version string. Non-printable characters are encoded (see
6909 below the section "Non-printable characters"). This is always the last
6910 field, and it is always delimited by quotes and is the only one which can
6911 contain quotes. If new fields are added to the log format, they will be
6912 added before this field. This field might be truncated if the request is
6913 huge and does not fit in the standard syslog buffer (1024 characters). This
6914 is the reason why this field must always remain the last one.
6915
6916
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069178.3. Advanced logging options
6918-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006919
6920Some advanced logging options are often looked for but are not easy to find out
6921just by looking at the various options. Here is an entry point for the few
6922options which can enable better logging. Please refer to the keywords reference
6923for more information about their usage.
6924
6925
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069268.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
6927------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006928
6929It is quite common to have some monitoring tools perform health checks on
6930haproxy. Sometimes it will be a layer 3 load-balancer such as LVS or any
6931commercial load-balancer, and sometimes it will simply be a more complete
6932monitoring system such as Nagios. When the tests are very frequent, users often
6933ask how to disable logging for those checks. There are three possibilities :
6934
6935 - if connections come from everywhere and are just TCP probes, it is often
6936 desired to simply disable logging of connections without data exchange, by
6937 setting "option dontlognull" in the frontend. It also disables logging of
6938 port scans, which may or may not be desired.
6939
6940 - if the connection come from a known source network, use "monitor-net" to
6941 declare this network as monitoring only. Any host in this network will then
6942 only be able to perform health checks, and their requests will not be
6943 logged. This is generally appropriate to designate a list of equipments
6944 such as other load-balancers.
6945
6946 - if the tests are performed on a known URI, use "monitor-uri" to declare
6947 this URI as dedicated to monitoring. Any host sending this request will
6948 only get the result of a health-check, and the request will not be logged.
6949
6950
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069518.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
6952----------------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006953
6954The problem with logging at end of connection is that you have no clue about
6955what is happening during very long sessions, such as remote terminal sessions
6956or large file downloads. This problem can be worked around by specifying
6957"option logasap" in the frontend. Haproxy will then log as soon as possible,
6958just before data transfer begins. This means that in case of TCP, it will still
6959log the connection status to the server, and in case of HTTP, it will log just
6960after processing the server headers. In this case, the number of bytes reported
6961is the number of header bytes sent to the client. In order to avoid confusion
6962with normal logs, the total time field and the number of bytes are prefixed
6963with a '+' sign which means that real numbers are certainly larger.
6964
6965
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069668.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
6967------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006968
6969Sometimes it is more convenient to separate normal traffic from errors logs,
6970for instance in order to ease error monitoring from log files. When the option
6971"log-separate-errors" is used, connections which experience errors, timeouts,
6972retries, redispatches or HTTP status codes 5xx will see their syslog level
6973raised from "info" to "err". This will help a syslog daemon store the log in
6974a separate file. It is very important to keep the errors in the normal traffic
6975file too, so that log ordering is not altered. You should also be careful if
6976you already have configured your syslog daemon to store all logs higher than
6977"notice" in an "admin" file, because the "err" level is higher than "notice".
6978
6979
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069808.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
6981--------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006982
6983Although this may sound strange at first, some large sites have to deal with
6984multiple thousands of logs per second and are experiencing difficulties keeping
6985them intact for a long time or detecting errors within them. If the option
6986"dontlog-normal" is set on the frontend, all normal connections will not be
6987logged. In this regard, a normal connection is defined as one without any
6988error, timeout, retry nor redispatch. In HTTP, the status code is checked too,
6989and a response with a status 5xx is not considered normal and will be logged
6990too. Of course, doing is is really discouraged as it will remove most of the
6991useful information from the logs. Do this only if you have no other
6992alternative.
6993
6994
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069958.4. Timing events
6996------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006997
6998Timers provide a great help in troubleshooting network problems. All values are
6999reported in milliseconds (ms). These timers should be used in conjunction with
7000the session termination flags. In TCP mode with "option tcplog" set on the
7001frontend, 3 control points are reported under the form "Tw/Tc/Tt", and in HTTP
7002mode, 5 control points are reported under the form "Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/Tt" :
7003
7004 - Tq: total time to get the client request (HTTP mode only). It's the time
7005 elapsed between the moment the client connection was accepted and the
7006 moment the proxy received the last HTTP header. The value "-1" indicates
7007 that the end of headers (empty line) has never been seen. This happens when
7008 the client closes prematurely or times out.
7009
7010 - Tw: total time spent in the queues waiting for a connection slot. It
7011 accounts for backend queue as well as the server queues, and depends on the
7012 queue size, and the time needed for the server to complete previous
7013 requests. The value "-1" means that the request was killed before reaching
7014 the queue, which is generally what happens with invalid or denied requests.
7015
7016 - Tc: total time to establish the TCP connection to the server. It's the time
7017 elapsed between the moment the proxy sent the connection request, and the
7018 moment it was acknowledged by the server, or between the TCP SYN packet and
7019 the matching SYN/ACK packet in return. The value "-1" means that the
7020 connection never established.
7021
7022 - Tr: server response time (HTTP mode only). It's the time elapsed between
7023 the moment the TCP connection was established to the server and the moment
7024 the server sent its complete response headers. It purely shows its request
7025 processing time, without the network overhead due to the data transmission.
7026 It is worth noting that when the client has data to send to the server, for
7027 instance during a POST request, the time already runs, and this can distort
7028 apparent response time. For this reason, it's generally wise not to trust
7029 too much this field for POST requests initiated from clients behind an
7030 untrusted network. A value of "-1" here means that the last the response
7031 header (empty line) was never seen, most likely because the server timeout
7032 stroke before the server managed to process the request.
7033
7034 - Tt: total session duration time, between the moment the proxy accepted it
7035 and the moment both ends were closed. The exception is when the "logasap"
7036 option is specified. In this case, it only equals (Tq+Tw+Tc+Tr), and is
7037 prefixed with a '+' sign. From this field, we can deduce "Td", the data
7038 transmission time, by substracting other timers when valid :
7039
7040 Td = Tt - (Tq + Tw + Tc + Tr)
7041
7042 Timers with "-1" values have to be excluded from this equation. In TCP
7043 mode, "Tq" and "Tr" have to be excluded too. Note that "Tt" can never be
7044 negative.
7045
7046These timers provide precious indications on trouble causes. Since the TCP
7047protocol defines retransmit delays of 3, 6, 12... seconds, we know for sure
7048that timers close to multiples of 3s are nearly always related to lost packets
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007049due to network problems (wires, negotiation, congestion). Moreover, if "Tt" is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007050close to a timeout value specified in the configuration, it often means that a
7051session has been aborted on timeout.
7052
7053Most common cases :
7054
7055 - If "Tq" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7056 client and the proxy. This is very rare on local networks but might happen
7057 when clients are on far remote networks and send large requests. It may
7058 happen that values larger than usual appear here without any network cause.
7059 Sometimes, during an attack or just after a resource starvation has ended,
7060 haproxy may accept thousands of connections in a few milliseconds. The time
7061 spent accepting these connections will inevitably slightly delay processing
7062 of other connections, and it can happen that request times in the order of
7063 a few tens of milliseconds are measured after a few thousands of new
7064 connections have been accepted at once.
7065
7066 - If "Tc" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7067 server and the proxy during the server connection phase. This value should
7068 always be very low, such as 1 ms on local networks and less than a few tens
7069 of ms on remote networks.
7070
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007071 - If "Tr" is nearly always lower than 3000 except some rare values which seem
7072 to be the average majored by 3000, there are probably some packets lost
7073 between the proxy and the server.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007074
7075 - If "Tt" is large even for small byte counts, it generally is because
7076 neither the client nor the server decides to close the connection, for
7077 instance because both have agreed on a keep-alive connection mode. In order
7078 to solve this issue, it will be needed to specify "option httpclose" on
7079 either the frontend or the backend. If the problem persists, it means that
7080 the server ignores the "close" connection mode and expects the client to
7081 close. Then it will be required to use "option forceclose". Having the
7082 smallest possible 'Tt' is important when connection regulation is used with
7083 the "maxconn" option on the servers, since no new connection will be sent
7084 to the server until another one is released.
7085
7086Other noticeable HTTP log cases ('xx' means any value to be ignored) :
7087
7088 Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/+Tt The "option logasap" is present on the frontend and the log
7089 was emitted before the data phase. All the timers are valid
7090 except "Tt" which is shorter than reality.
7091
7092 -1/xx/xx/xx/Tt The client was not able to send a complete request in time
7093 or it aborted too early. Check the session termination flags
7094 then "timeout http-request" and "timeout client" settings.
7095
7096 Tq/-1/xx/xx/Tt It was not possible to process the request, maybe because
7097 servers were out of order, because the request was invalid
7098 or forbidden by ACL rules. Check the session termination
7099 flags.
7100
7101 Tq/Tw/-1/xx/Tt The connection could not establish on the server. Either it
7102 actively refused it or it timed out after Tt-(Tq+Tw) ms.
7103 Check the session termination flags, then check the
7104 "timeout connect" setting. Note that the tarpit action might
7105 return similar-looking patterns, with "Tw" equal to the time
7106 the client connection was maintained open.
7107
7108 Tq/Tw/Tc/-1/Tt The server has accepted the connection but did not return
7109 a complete response in time, or it closed its connexion
7110 unexpectedly after Tt-(Tq+Tw+Tc) ms. Check the session
7111 termination flags, then check the "timeout server" setting.
7112
7113
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071148.5. Session state at disconnection
7115-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007116
7117TCP and HTTP logs provide a session termination indicator in the
7118"termination_state" field, just before the number of active connections. It is
71192-characters long in TCP mode, and is extended to 4 characters in HTTP mode,
7120each of which has a special meaning :
7121
7122 - On the first character, a code reporting the first event which caused the
7123 session to terminate :
7124
7125 C : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the client.
7126
7127 S : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the server, or the
7128 server explicitly refused it.
7129
7130 P : the session was prematurely aborted by the proxy, because of a
7131 connection limit enforcement, because a DENY filter was matched,
7132 because of a security check which detected and blocked a dangerous
7133 error in server response which might have caused information leak
7134 (eg: cacheable cookie), or because the response was processed by
7135 the proxy (redirect, stats, etc...).
7136
7137 R : a resource on the proxy has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source
7138 ports, ...). Usually, this appears during the connection phase, and
7139 system logs should contain a copy of the precise error. If this
7140 happens, it must be considered as a very serious anomaly which
7141 should be fixed as soon as possible by any means.
7142
7143 I : an internal error was identified by the proxy during a self-check.
7144 This should NEVER happen, and you are encouraged to report any log
7145 containing this, because this would almost certainly be a bug. It
7146 would be wise to preventively restart the process after such an
7147 event too, in case it would be caused by memory corruption.
7148
7149 c : the client-side timeout expired while waiting for the client to
7150 send or receive data.
7151
7152 s : the server-side timeout expired while waiting for the server to
7153 send or receive data.
7154
7155 - : normal session completion, both the client and the server closed
7156 with nothing left in the buffers.
7157
7158 - on the second character, the TCP or HTTP session state when it was closed :
7159
7160 R : th proxy was waiting for a complete, valid REQUEST from the client
7161 (HTTP mode only). Nothing was sent to any server.
7162
7163 Q : the proxy was waiting in the QUEUE for a connection slot. This can
7164 only happen when servers have a 'maxconn' parameter set. It can
7165 also happen in the global queue after a redispatch consecutive to
7166 a failed attempt to connect to a dying server. If no redispatch is
7167 reported, then no connection attempt was made to any server.
7168
7169 C : the proxy was waiting for the CONNECTION to establish on the
7170 server. The server might at most have noticed a connection attempt.
7171
7172 H : the proxy was waiting for complete, valid response HEADERS from the
7173 server (HTTP only).
7174
7175 D : the session was in the DATA phase.
7176
7177 L : the proxy was still transmitting LAST data to the client while the
7178 server had already finished. This one is very rare as it can only
7179 happen when the client dies while receiving the last packets.
7180
7181 T : the request was tarpitted. It has been held open with the client
7182 during the whole "timeout tarpit" duration or until the client
7183 closed, both of which will be reported in the "Tw" timer.
7184
7185 - : normal session completion after end of data transfer.
7186
7187 - the third character tells whether the persistence cookie was provided by
7188 the client (only in HTTP mode) :
7189
7190 N : the client provided NO cookie. This is usually the case for new
7191 visitors, so counting the number of occurrences of this flag in the
7192 logs generally indicate a valid trend for the site frequentation.
7193
7194 I : the client provided an INVALID cookie matching no known server.
7195 This might be caused by a recent configuration change, mixed
7196 cookies between HTTP/HTTPS sites, or an attack.
7197
7198 D : the client provided a cookie designating a server which was DOWN,
7199 so either "option persist" was used and the client was sent to
7200 this server, or it was not set and the client was redispatched to
7201 another server.
7202
7203 V : the client provided a valid cookie, and was sent to the associated
7204 server.
7205
7206 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7207
7208 - the last character reports what operations were performed on the persistence
7209 cookie returned by the server (only in HTTP mode) :
7210
7211 N : NO cookie was provided by the server, and none was inserted either.
7212
7213 I : no cookie was provided by the server, and the proxy INSERTED one.
7214 Note that in "cookie insert" mode, if the server provides a cookie,
7215 it will still be overwritten and reported as "I" here.
7216
7217 P : a cookie was PROVIDED by the server and transmitted as-is.
7218
7219 R : the cookie provided by the server was REWRITTEN by the proxy, which
7220 happens in "cookie rewrite" or "cookie prefix" modes.
7221
7222 D : the cookie provided by the server was DELETED by the proxy.
7223
7224 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7225
7226The combination of the two first flags give a lot of information about what was
7227happening when the session terminated, and why it did terminate. It can be
7228helpful to detect server saturation, network troubles, local system resource
7229starvation, attacks, etc...
7230
7231The most common termination flags combinations are indicated below. They are
7232alphabetically sorted, with the lowercase set just after the upper case for
7233easier finding and understanding.
7234
7235 Flags Reason
7236
7237 -- Normal termination.
7238
7239 CC The client aborted before the connection could be established to the
7240 server. This can happen when haproxy tries to connect to a recently
7241 dead (or unchecked) server, and the client aborts while haproxy is
7242 waiting for the server to respond or for "timeout connect" to expire.
7243
7244 CD The client unexpectedly aborted during data transfer. This can be
7245 caused by a browser crash, by an intermediate equipment between the
7246 client and haproxy which decided to actively break the connection,
7247 by network routing issues between the client and haproxy, or by a
7248 keep-alive session between the server and the client terminated first
7249 by the client.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007250
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007251 cD The client did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7252 "timeout client" delay. This is often caused by network failures on
7253 the client side, or the client simply leaving the net uncleanly.
7254
7255 CH The client aborted while waiting for the server to start responding.
7256 It might be the server taking too long to respond or the client
7257 clicking the 'Stop' button too fast.
7258
7259 cH The "timeout client" stroke while waiting for client data during a
7260 POST request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values
7261 for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized packets. It can
7262 also happen when client timeout is smaller than server timeout and
7263 the server takes too long to respond.
7264
7265 CQ The client aborted while its session was queued, waiting for a server
7266 with enough empty slots to accept it. It might be that either all the
7267 servers were saturated or that the assigned server was taking too
7268 long a time to respond.
7269
7270 CR The client aborted before sending a full HTTP request. Most likely
7271 the request was typed by hand using a telnet client, and aborted
7272 too early. The HTTP status code is likely a 400 here. Sometimes this
7273 might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection between haproxy
7274 and the client.
7275
7276 cR The "timeout http-request" stroke before the client sent a full HTTP
7277 request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values on the
7278 client side for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized
7279 packets, or by clients sending requests by hand and not typing fast
7280 enough, or forgetting to enter the empty line at the end of the
7281 request. The HTTP status code is likely a 408 here.
7282
7283 CT The client aborted while its session was tarpitted. It is important to
7284 check if this happens on valid requests, in order to be sure that no
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007285 wrong tarpit rules have been written. If a lot of them happen, it
7286 might make sense to lower the "timeout tarpit" value to something
7287 closer to the average reported "Tw" timer, in order not to consume
7288 resources for just a few attackers.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007289
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007290 SC The server or an equipment between it and haproxy explicitly refused
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007291 the TCP connection (the proxy received a TCP RST or an ICMP message
7292 in return). Under some circumstances, it can also be the network
7293 stack telling the proxy that the server is unreachable (eg: no route,
7294 or no ARP response on local network). When this happens in HTTP mode,
7295 the status code is likely a 502 or 503 here.
7296
7297 sC The "timeout connect" stroke before a connection to the server could
7298 complete. When this happens in HTTP mode, the status code is likely a
7299 503 or 504 here.
7300
7301 SD The connection to the server died with an error during the data
7302 transfer. This usually means that haproxy has received an RST from
7303 the server or an ICMP message from an intermediate equipment while
7304 exchanging data with the server. This can be caused by a server crash
7305 or by a network issue on an intermediate equipment.
7306
7307 sD The server did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7308 "timeout server" setting during the data phase. This is often caused
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007309 by too short timeouts on L4 equipments before the server (firewalls,
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007310 load-balancers, ...), as well as keep-alive sessions maintained
7311 between the client and the server expiring first on haproxy.
7312
7313 SH The server aborted before sending its full HTTP response headers, or
7314 it crashed while processing the request. Since a server aborting at
7315 this moment is very rare, it would be wise to inspect its logs to
7316 control whether it crashed and why. The logged request may indicate a
7317 small set of faulty requests, demonstrating bugs in the application.
7318 Sometimes this might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection
7319 between haproxy and the server.
7320
7321 sH The "timeout server" stroke before the server could return its
7322 response headers. This is the most common anomaly, indicating too
7323 long transactions, probably caused by server or database saturation.
7324 The immediate workaround consists in increasing the "timeout server"
7325 setting, but it is important to keep in mind that the user experience
7326 will suffer from these long response times. The only long term
7327 solution is to fix the application.
7328
7329 sQ The session spent too much time in queue and has been expired. See
7330 the "timeout queue" and "timeout connect" settings to find out how to
7331 fix this if it happens too often. If it often happens massively in
7332 short periods, it may indicate general problems on the affected
7333 servers due to I/O or database congestion, or saturation caused by
7334 external attacks.
7335
7336 PC The proxy refused to establish a connection to the server because the
7337 process' socket limit has been reached while attempting to connect.
7338 The global "maxconn" parameter may be increased in the configuration
7339 so that it does not happen anymore. This status is very rare and
7340 might happen when the global "ulimit-n" parameter is forced by hand.
7341
7342 PH The proxy blocked the server's response, because it was invalid,
7343 incomplete, dangerous (cache control), or matched a security filter.
7344 In any case, an HTTP 502 error is sent to the client. One possible
7345 cause for this error is an invalid syntax in an HTTP header name
7346 containing unauthorized characters.
7347
7348 PR The proxy blocked the client's HTTP request, either because of an
7349 invalid HTTP syntax, in which case it returned an HTTP 400 error to
7350 the client, or because a deny filter matched, in which case it
7351 returned an HTTP 403 error.
7352
7353 PT The proxy blocked the client's request and has tarpitted its
7354 connection before returning it a 500 server error. Nothing was sent
7355 to the server. The connection was maintained open for as long as
7356 reported by the "Tw" timer field.
7357
7358 RC A local resource has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source ports)
7359 preventing the connection to the server from establishing. The error
7360 logs will tell precisely what was missing. This is very rare and can
7361 only be solved by proper system tuning.
7362
7363
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073648.6. Non-printable characters
7365-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007366
7367In order not to cause trouble to log analysis tools or terminals during log
7368consulting, non-printable characters are not sent as-is into log files, but are
7369converted to the two-digits hexadecimal representation of their ASCII code,
7370prefixed by the character '#'. The only characters that can be logged without
7371being escaped are comprised between 32 and 126 (inclusive). Obviously, the
7372escape character '#' itself is also encoded to avoid any ambiguity ("#23"). It
7373is the same for the character '"' which becomes "#22", as well as '{', '|' and
7374'}' when logging headers.
7375
7376Note that the space character (' ') is not encoded in headers, which can cause
7377issues for tools relying on space count to locate fields. A typical header
7378containing spaces is "User-Agent".
7379
7380Last, it has been observed that some syslog daemons such as syslog-ng escape
7381the quote ('"') with a backslash ('\'). The reverse operation can safely be
7382performed since no quote may appear anywhere else in the logs.
7383
7384
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073858.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
7386---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007387
7388Cookie capture simplifies the tracking a complete user session. This can be
7389achieved using the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend. Please refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007390section 4.2 for more details. Only one cookie can be captured, and the same
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007391cookie will simultaneously be checked in the request ("Cookie:" header) and in
7392the response ("Set-Cookie:" header). The respective values will be reported in
7393the HTTP logs at the "captured_request_cookie" and "captured_response_cookie"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007394locations (see section 8.2.3 about HTTP log format). When either cookie is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007395not seen, a dash ('-') replaces the value. This way, it's easy to detect when a
7396user switches to a new session for example, because the server will reassign it
7397a new cookie. It is also possible to detect if a server unexpectedly sets a
7398wrong cookie to a client, leading to session crossing.
7399
7400 Examples :
7401 # capture the first cookie whose name starts with "ASPSESSION"
7402 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
7403
7404 # capture the first cookie whose name is exactly "vgnvisitor"
7405 capture cookie vgnvisitor= len 32
7406
7407
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020074088.8. Capturing HTTP headers
7409---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007410
7411Header captures are useful to track unique request identifiers set by an upper
7412proxy, virtual host names, user-agents, POST content-length, referrers, etc. In
7413the response, one can search for information about the response length, how the
7414server asked the cache to behave, or an object location during a redirection.
7415
7416Header captures are performed using the "capture request header" and "capture
7417response header" statements in the frontend. Please consult their definition in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007418section 4.2 for more details.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007419
7420It is possible to include both request headers and response headers at the same
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007421time. Non-existent headers are logged as empty strings, and if one header
7422appears more than once, only its last occurrence will be logged. Request headers
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007423are grouped within braces '{' and '}' in the same order as they were declared,
7424and delimited with a vertical bar '|' without any space. Response headers
7425follow the same representation, but are displayed after a space following the
7426request headers block. These blocks are displayed just before the HTTP request
7427in the logs.
7428
7429 Example :
7430 # This instance chains to the outgoing proxy
7431 listen proxy-out
7432 mode http
7433 option httplog
7434 option logasap
7435 log global
7436 server cache1 192.168.1.1:3128
7437
7438 # log the name of the virtual server
7439 capture request header Host len 20
7440
7441 # log the amount of data uploaded during a POST
7442 capture request header Content-Length len 10
7443
7444 # log the beginning of the referrer
7445 capture request header Referer len 20
7446
7447 # server name (useful for outgoing proxies only)
7448 capture response header Server len 20
7449
7450 # logging the content-length is useful with "option logasap"
7451 capture response header Content-Length len 10
7452
7453 # log the expected cache behaviour on the response
7454 capture response header Cache-Control len 8
7455
7456 # the Via header will report the next proxy's name
7457 capture response header Via len 20
7458
7459 # log the URL location during a redirection
7460 capture response header Location len 20
7461
7462 >>> Aug 9 20:26:09 localhost \
7463 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34014 [09/Aug/2004:20:26:09] proxy-out \
7464 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/162/+162 200 +350 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7465 {fr.adserver.yahoo.co||http://fr.f416.mail.} {|864|private||} \
7466 "GET http://fr.adserver.yahoo.com/"
7467
7468 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7469 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34020 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7470 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/182/+182 200 +279 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7471 {w.ods.org||} {Formilux/0.1.8|3495|||} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007472 "GET http://trafic.1wt.eu/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007473
7474 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7475 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34028 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7476 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/2/126/+128 301 +223 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7477 {www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr||http://trafic.1wt.eu/} \
7478 {Apache|230|||http://www.sytadin.} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007479 "GET http://www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007480
7481
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020074828.9. Examples of logs
7483---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007484
7485These are real-world examples of logs accompanied with an explanation. Some of
7486them have been made up by hand. The syslog part has been removed for better
7487reading. Their sole purpose is to explain how to decipher them.
7488
7489 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33318 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.130] px-http \
7490 px-http/srv1 6559/0/7/147/6723 200 243 - - ---- 5/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7491 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7492
7493 => long request (6.5s) entered by hand through 'telnet'. The server replied
7494 in 147 ms, and the session ended normally ('----')
7495
7496 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33319 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.149] px-http \
7497 px-http/srv1 6559/1230/7/147/6870 200 243 - - ---- 324/239/239/99/0 \
7498 0/9 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7499
7500 => Idem, but the request was queued in the global queue behind 9 other
7501 requests, and waited there for 1230 ms.
7502
7503 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.654] px-http \
7504 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7505 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
7506
7507 => request for a long data transfer. The "logasap" option was specified, so
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007508 the log was produced just before transferring data. The server replied in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007509 14 ms, 243 bytes of headers were sent to the client, and total time from
7510 accept to first data byte is 30 ms.
7511
7512 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.925] px-http \
7513 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/30 502 243 - - PH-- 3/2/2/0/0 0/0 \
7514 "GET /cgi-bin/bug.cgi? HTTP/1.0"
7515
7516 => the proxy blocked a server response either because of an "rspdeny" or
7517 "rspideny" filter, or because the response was improperly formatted and
7518 not HTTP-compliant, or because it blocked sensible information which
7519 risked being cached. In this case, the response is replaced with a "502
7520 bad gateway". The flags ("PH--") tell us that it was haproxy who decided
7521 to return the 502 and not the server.
7522
7523 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34548 [15/Oct/2003:15:18:55.798] px-http \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007524 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/8490 -1 0 - - CR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007525
7526 => the client never completed its request and aborted itself ("C---") after
7527 8.5s, while the proxy was waiting for the request headers ("-R--").
7528 Nothing was sent to any server.
7529
7530 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34549 [15/Oct/2003:15:19:06.103] px-http \
7531 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/50001 408 0 - - cR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
7532
7533 => The client never completed its request, which was aborted by the
7534 time-out ("c---") after 50s, while the proxy was waiting for the request
7535 headers ("-R--"). Nothing was sent to any server, but the proxy could
7536 send a 408 return code to the client.
7537
7538 >>> haproxy[18989]: 127.0.0.1:34550 [15/Oct/2003:15:24:28.312] px-tcp \
7539 px-tcp/srv1 0/0/5007 0 cD 0/0/0/0/0 0/0
7540
7541 => This log was produced with "option tcplog". The client timed out after
7542 5 seconds ("c----").
7543
7544 >>> haproxy[18989]: 10.0.0.1:34552 [15/Oct/2003:15:26:31.462] px-http \
7545 px-http/srv1 3183/-1/-1/-1/11215 503 0 - - SC-- 205/202/202/115/3 \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007546 0/0 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007547
7548 => The request took 3s to complete (probably a network problem), and the
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007549 connection to the server failed ('SC--') after 4 attempts of 2 seconds
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007550 (config says 'retries 3'), and no redispatch (otherwise we would have
7551 seen "/+3"). Status code 503 was returned to the client. There were 115
7552 connections on this server, 202 connections on this proxy, and 205 on
7553 the global process. It is possible that the server refused the
7554 connection because of too many already established.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007555
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007556
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020075579. Statistics and monitoring
7558----------------------------
7559
7560It is possible to query HAProxy about its status. The most commonly used
7561mechanism is the HTTP statistics page. This page also exposes an alternative
7562CSV output format for monitoring tools. The same format is provided on the
7563Unix socket.
7564
7565
75669.1. CSV format
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007567---------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007568
Willy Tarreau7f062c42009-03-05 18:43:00 +01007569The statistics may be consulted either from the unix socket or from the HTTP
7570page. Both means provide a CSV format whose fields follow.
7571
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007572 0. pxname: proxy name
7573 1. svname: service name (FRONTEND for frontend, BACKEND for backend, any name
7574 for server)
7575 2. qcur: current queued requests
7576 3. qmax: max queued requests
7577 4. scur: current sessions
7578 5. smax: max sessions
7579 6. slim: sessions limit
7580 7. stot: total sessions
7581 8. bin: bytes in
7582 9. bout: bytes out
7583 10. dreq: denied requests
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007584 11. dresp: denied responses
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007585 12. ereq: request errors
7586 13. econ: connection errors
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007587 14. eresp: response errors
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007588 15. wretr: retries (warning)
7589 16. wredis: redispatches (warning)
Cyril Bonté0dae5852010-02-03 00:26:28 +01007590 17. status: status (UP/DOWN/NOLB/MAINT/MAINT(via)...)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007591 18. weight: server weight (server), total weight (backend)
7592 19. act: server is active (server), number of active servers (backend)
7593 20. bck: server is backup (server), number of backup servers (backend)
7594 21. chkfail: number of failed checks
7595 22. chkdown: number of UP->DOWN transitions
7596 23. lastchg: last status change (in seconds)
7597 24. downtime: total downtime (in seconds)
7598 25. qlimit: queue limit
7599 26. pid: process id (0 for first instance, 1 for second, ...)
7600 27. iid: unique proxy id
7601 28. sid: service id (unique inside a proxy)
7602 29. throttle: warm up status
7603 30. lbtot: total number of times a server was selected
7604 31. tracked: id of proxy/server if tracking is enabled
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02007605 32. type (0=frontend, 1=backend, 2=server, 3=socket)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkidb57c6b2009-08-31 21:23:27 +02007606 33. rate: number of sessions per second over last elapsed second
7607 34. rate_lim: limit on new sessions per second
7608 35. rate_max: max number of new sessions per second
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007609 36. check_status: status of last health check, one of:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01007610 UNK -> unknown
7611 INI -> initializing
7612 SOCKERR -> socket error
7613 L4OK -> check passed on layer 4, no upper layers testing enabled
7614 L4TMOUT -> layer 1-4 timeout
7615 L4CON -> layer 1-4 connection problem, for example
7616 "Connection refused" (tcp rst) or "No route to host" (icmp)
7617 L6OK -> check passed on layer 6
7618 L6TOUT -> layer 6 (SSL) timeout
7619 L6RSP -> layer 6 invalid response - protocol error
7620 L7OK -> check passed on layer 7
7621 L7OKC -> check conditionally passed on layer 7, for example 404 with
7622 disable-on-404
7623 L7TOUT -> layer 7 (HTTP/SMTP) timeout
7624 L7RSP -> layer 7 invalid response - protocol error
7625 L7STS -> layer 7 response error, for example HTTP 5xx
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007626 37. check_code: layer5-7 code, if available
7627 38. check_duration: time in ms took to finish last health check
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007628 39. hrsp_1xx: http responses with 1xx code
7629 40. hrsp_2xx: http responses with 2xx code
7630 41. hrsp_3xx: http responses with 3xx code
7631 42. hrsp_4xx: http responses with 4xx code
7632 43. hrsp_5xx: http responses with 5xx code
7633 44. hrsp_other: http responses with other codes (protocol error)
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007634 45. hanafail: failed health checks details
7635 46. req_rate: HTTP requests per second over last elapsed second
7636 47. req_rate_max: max number of HTTP requests per second observed
7637 48. req_tot: total number of HTTP requests received
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007638
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007639
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020076409.2. Unix Socket commands
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007641-------------------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007642
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007643The following commands are supported on the UNIX stats socket ; all of them
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007644must be terminated by a line feed. The socket supports pipelining, so that it
7645is possible to chain multiple commands at once provided they are delimited by
7646a semi-colon or a line feed, although the former is more reliable as it has no
7647risk of being truncated over the network. The responses themselves will each be
7648followed by an empty line, so it will be easy for an external script to match a
7649given response with a given request. By default one command line is processed
7650then the connection closes, but there is an interactive allowing multiple lines
7651to be issued one at a time.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007652
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007653It is important to understand that when multiple haproxy processes are started
7654on the same sockets, any process may pick up the request and will output its
7655own stats.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007656
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007657clear counters
7658 Clear the max values of the statistics counters in each proxy (frontend &
7659 backend) and in each server. The cumulated counters are not affected. This
7660 can be used to get clean counters after an incident, without having to
7661 restart nor to clear traffic counters. This command is restricted and can
7662 only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
7663
7664clear counters all
7665 Clear all statistics counters in each proxy (frontend & backend) and in each
7666 server. This has the same effect as restarting. This command is restricted
7667 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin".
7668
7669disable server <backend>/<server>
7670 Mark the server DOWN for maintenance. In this mode, no more checks will be
7671 performed on the server until it leaves maintenance.
7672 If the server is tracked by other servers, those servers will be set to DOWN
7673 during the maintenance.
7674
7675 In the statistics page, a server DOWN for maintenance will appear with a
7676 "MAINT" status, its tracking servers with the "MAINT(via)" one.
7677
7678 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7679 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7680
7681 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7682 level "admin".
7683
7684enable server <backend>/<server>
7685 If the server was previously marked as DOWN for maintenance, this marks the
7686 server UP and checks are re-enabled.
7687
7688 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7689 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7690
7691 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7692 level "admin".
7693
7694get weight <backend>/<server>
7695 Report the current weight and the initial weight of server <server> in
7696 backend <backend> or an error if either doesn't exist. The initial weight is
7697 the one that appears in the configuration file. Both are normally equal
7698 unless the current weight has been changed. Both the backend and the server
7699 may be specified either by their name or by their numeric ID, prefixed with a
7700 dash ('#').
7701
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007702help
7703 Print the list of known keywords and their basic usage. The same help screen
7704 is also displayed for unknown commands.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007705
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007706prompt
7707 Toggle the prompt at the beginning of the line and enter or leave interactive
7708 mode. In interactive mode, the connection is not closed after a command
7709 completes. Instead, the prompt will appear again, indicating the user that
7710 the interpreter is waiting for a new command. The prompt consists in a right
7711 angle bracket followed by a space "> ". This mode is particularly convenient
7712 when one wants to periodically check information such as stats or errors.
7713 It is also a good idea to enter interactive mode before issuing a "help"
7714 command.
7715
7716quit
7717 Close the connection when in interactive mode.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007718
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007719set timeout cli <delay>
7720 Change the CLI interface timeout for current connection. This can be useful
7721 during long debugging sessions where the user needs to constantly inspect
7722 some indicators without being disconnected. The delay is passed in seconds.
7723
7724set weight <backend>/<server> <weight>[%]
7725 Change a server's weight to the value passed in argument. If the value ends
7726 with the '%' sign, then the new weight will be relative to the initially
7727 configured weight. Relative weights are only permitted between 0 and 100%,
7728 and absolute weights are permitted between 0 and 256. Servers which are part
7729 of a farm running a static load-balancing algorithm have stricter limitations
7730 because the weight cannot change once set. Thus for these servers, the only
7731 accepted values are 0 and 100% (or 0 and the initial weight). Changes take
7732 effect immediately, though certain LB algorithms require a certain amount of
7733 requests to consider changes. A typical usage of this command is to disable
7734 a server during an update by setting its weight to zero, then to enable it
7735 again after the update by setting it back to 100%. This command is restricted
7736 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin". Both the
7737 backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by their
7738 numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7739
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007740show errors [<iid>]
7741 Dump last known request and response errors collected by frontends and
7742 backends. If <iid> is specified, the limit the dump to errors concerning
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007743 either frontend or backend whose ID is <iid>. This command is restricted
7744 and can only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or
7745 "admin".
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007746
7747 The errors which may be collected are the last request and response errors
7748 caused by protocol violations, often due to invalid characters in header
7749 names. The report precisely indicates what exact character violated the
7750 protocol. Other important information such as the exact date the error was
7751 detected, frontend and backend names, the server name (when known), the
7752 internal session ID and the source address which has initiated the session
7753 are reported too.
7754
7755 All characters are returned, and non-printable characters are encoded. The
7756 most common ones (\t = 9, \n = 10, \r = 13 and \e = 27) are encoded as one
7757 letter following a backslash. The backslash itself is encoded as '\\' to
7758 avoid confusion. Other non-printable characters are encoded '\xNN' where
7759 NN is the two-digits hexadecimal representation of the character's ASCII
7760 code.
7761
7762 Lines are prefixed with the position of their first character, starting at 0
7763 for the beginning of the buffer. At most one input line is printed per line,
7764 and large lines will be broken into multiple consecutive output lines so that
7765 the output never goes beyond 79 characters wide. It is easy to detect if a
7766 line was broken, because it will not end with '\n' and the next line's offset
7767 will be followed by a '+' sign, indicating it is a continuation of previous
7768 line.
7769
7770 Example :
7771 >>> $ echo "show errors" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
7772 [04/Mar/2009:15:46:56.081] backend http-in (#2) : invalid response
7773 src 127.0.0.1, session #54, frontend fe-eth0 (#1), server s2 (#1)
7774 response length 213 bytes, error at position 23:
7775
7776 00000 HTTP/1.0 200 OK\r\n
7777 00017 header/bizarre:blah\r\n
7778 00038 Location: blah\r\n
7779 00054 Long-line: this is a very long line which should b
7780 00104+ e broken into multiple lines on the output buffer,
7781 00154+ otherwise it would be too large to print in a ter
7782 00204+ minal\r\n
7783 00211 \r\n
7784
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007785 In the example above, we see that the backend "http-in" which has internal
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007786 ID 2 has blocked an invalid response from its server s2 which has internal
7787 ID 1. The request was on session 54 initiated by source 127.0.0.1 and
7788 received by frontend fe-eth0 whose ID is 1. The total response length was
7789 213 bytes when the error was detected, and the error was at byte 23. This
7790 is the slash ('/') in header name "header/bizarre", which is not a valid
7791 HTTP character for a header name.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007792
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007793show info
7794 Dump info about haproxy status on current process.
7795
7796show sess
7797 Dump all known sessions. Avoid doing this on slow connections as this can
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007798 be huge. This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets
7799 configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
7800
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007801
7802show stat [<iid> <type> <sid>]
7803 Dump statistics in the CSV format. By passing <id>, <type> and <sid>, it is
7804 possible to dump only selected items :
7805 - <iid> is a proxy ID, -1 to dump everything
7806 - <type> selects the type of dumpable objects : 1 for frontends, 2 for
7807 backends, 4 for servers, -1 for everything. These values can be ORed,
7808 for example:
7809 1 + 2 = 3 -> frontend + backend.
7810 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 -> frontend + backend + server.
7811 - <sid> is a server ID, -1 to dump everything from the selected proxy.
7812
7813 Example :
7814 >>> $ echo "show info;show stat" | socat stdio unix-connect:/tmp/sock1
7815 Name: HAProxy
7816 Version: 1.4-dev2-49
7817 Release_date: 2009/09/23
7818 Nbproc: 1
7819 Process_num: 1
7820 (...)
7821
7822 # pxname,svname,qcur,qmax,scur,smax,slim,stot,bin,bout,dreq, (...)
7823 stats,FRONTEND,,,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,,OPEN,,,,,,,,,1,1,0, (...)
7824 stats,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,0,0,0,,0,250,(...)
7825 (...)
7826 www1,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,1,1,0,,0,250, (...)
7827
7828 $
7829
7830 Here, two commands have been issued at once. That way it's easy to find
7831 which process the stats apply to in multi-process mode. Notice the empty
7832 line after the information output which marks the end of the first block.
7833 A similar empty line appears at the end of the second block (stats) so that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007834 the reader knows the output has not been truncated.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007835
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02007836
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01007837/*
7838 * Local variables:
7839 * fill-column: 79
7840 * End:
7841 */